US20230148652A1 - Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex - Google Patents
Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230148652A1 US20230148652A1 US17/987,570 US202217987570A US2023148652A1 US 20230148652 A1 US20230148652 A1 US 20230148652A1 US 202217987570 A US202217987570 A US 202217987570A US 2023148652 A1 US2023148652 A1 US 2023148652A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- nicotine
- composition
- acid
- pouched product
- pouch
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B13/00—Tobacco for pipes, for cigars, e.g. cigar inserts, or for cigarettes; Chewing tobacco; Snuff
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/10—Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/16—Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes of tobacco substitutes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/18—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/28—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
- A24B15/281—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances the action of the chemical substances being delayed
- A24B15/283—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances the action of the chemical substances being delayed by encapsulation of the chemical substances
- A24B15/284—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances the action of the chemical substances being delayed by encapsulation of the chemical substances the additive being bound to a host by chemical, electrical or like forces, e.g. use of precursors, inclusion complexes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/18—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/28—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
- A24B15/285—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances characterised by structural features, e.g. particle shape or size
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/18—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/28—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
- A24B15/30—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic substances
- A24B15/302—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic substances by natural substances obtained from animals or plants
- A24B15/303—Plant extracts other than tobacco
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/18—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/28—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
- A24B15/30—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic substances
- A24B15/32—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic substances by acyclic compounds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A24—TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
- A24B—MANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
- A24B15/00—Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
- A24B15/18—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
- A24B15/28—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
- A24B15/42—Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic and inorganic substances
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to products intended for human use.
- the products are configured for oral use and deliver substances such as flavors and/or active ingredients during use.
- Such products may include tobacco or a product derived from tobacco, or may be tobacco-free alternatives.
- Such products typically contain flavorants and/or active ingredients such as nicotine, caffeine, botanicals, or cannabidiol.
- the format of such products can vary, and include pouched products containing a powdered or granular composition, lozenges, pastilles, liquids, gels, emulsions, meltable compositions, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos.
- the present disclosure relates to products incorporating a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex.
- the products comprise two or more, different nicotine components (including at least one such component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex).
- the nicotine release profile within a consumer's oral cavity can be modified (e.g., extended) as compared with that of a product comprising nicotine in other forms or nicotine in only one form, respectively.
- the inclusion of nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and/or as two or more nicotine components within a single product can further improve the shelf life of the product.
- Some such products are pouched products including an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity containing a composition comprising a water-soluble component capable of being released through the water-permeable pouch.
- the composition within the cavity of the pouch can contain a nicotine component comprising nicotine in the form of a nicotine complex (e.g., a nicotine polymer complex, e.g., wherein the polymer comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin).
- the composition within the cavity of the pouch can contain the nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex as a first nicotine component, and can further comprise a second, different nicotine component (e.g., in the form of a nicotine extract such as a tobacco-derived nicotine extract or in the form of synthetic nicotine) and/or a nicotine salt.
- the composition within the cavity can further comprise various components, including, but not limited to, flavorants, sweeteners, fillers, and the like.
- the composition within the cavity further comprises an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salt, e.g., comprising calcium or magnesium.
- the composition within the cavity may further comprise other salts.
- the alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salt is a salt of an organic acid.
- the composition comprises a calcium salt of an organic acid.
- the calcium salt is calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof.
- the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate.
- the calcium salt is calcium benzoate.
- the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate.
- the composition comprises benzoic acid and calcium hydroxide, wherein calcium benzoate is formed in situ in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof.
- the composition comprises benzoic acid, sodium benzoate, calcium benzoate, or a combination thereof, and further comprises an additional alkali metal salt, alkaline earth metal salt, or a combination thereof.
- the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises calcium.
- the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises calcium and an additional organic acid.
- the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises lactic acid, gluconic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, or a combination thereof.
- the composition comprises calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof.
- the composition comprises calcium lactate gluconate.
- At least a portion of the alkali metal salt of the organic acid, the alkaline earth metal salt of the organic acid, or both, where present, is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine-polymer complex in the form of a salt, an ion pair, or a combination thereof.
- At least about 40%, or at least about 60% of the nicotine present in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex is released from the composition when a sample of the composition is added to a volume of water and agitated using a rotary shaker at 250 RPM for a period of two hours and at a temperature of 37° C., forming a solution comprising nicotine.
- the solution has a pH from about 5.0 to about 6.5. In some embodiments, the solution has a LogD greater than zero.
- the composition within the cavity of the pouch is a smokeless tobacco product or nicotine replacement therapy product.
- the composition within the cavity of the pouch can be a particulate material adapted for steeping or brewing (i.e., configured for liquid extraction), such as a tea or coffee material.
- the composition within the cavity of the pouch can comprise a particulate or fibrous plant material such as would be found in various teas or tea variants.
- the composition within the cavity can comprise a flavor component such that flavor can be added to a liquid (e.g., water).
- the invention includes, without limitation, the following embodiments.
- Embodiment 1 A pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, the pouched product having a total moisture content of about 5% or greater, wherein the composition comprises a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex.
- Embodiment 2 The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the nicotine component is the only nicotine component contained within the composition.
- Embodiment 3 The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the nicotine component is a first nicotine component and the composition further comprises a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 4 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the total moisture content of the pouched product is about 5% or greater, about 10% or greater, about 15% or greater, about 25% or greater, or about 30% or greater.
- Embodiment 5 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the total moisture content is about 48% or less, about 40% or less, about 30% or less, about 25% or less, about 20% or less, about 15% or less, or about 10% or less.
- Embodiment 6 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein the first nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 2% to about 15% by weight and the second nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 0.5% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- Embodiment 7 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a higher weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 8 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a lower weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 9 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 8, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin.
- Embodiment 10 The pouched product of Embodiment 9, wherein the polymeric cation exchange resin comprises a polyacrylic polymer.
- Embodiment 11 The pouched product of Embodiment 9, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
- Embodiment 12 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is a tobacco-derived nicotine extract.
- Embodiment 13 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is synthetic nicotine.
- Embodiment 14 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 15 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 14, wherein at least a portion of the second nicotine component is in the form of a particulate non-tobacco material treated to contain the second nicotine component, and fibrous plant material carrying the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 16 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 15, wherein the composition comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of one or more additional fillers, binders, pH adjusters, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, and preservatives.
- Embodiment 17 The pouched product of Embodiment 16, wherein the composition comprises a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- Embodiment 18 The pouched product of Embodiment 17, wherein the composition comprises calcium hydroxide.
- Embodiment 19 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of about 6-9.
- Embodiment 20 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 6.5.
- Embodiment 21 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 5.
- Embodiment 22 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 21, wherein the composition comprises about 5% or more of a humectant.
- Embodiment 23 The pouched product of Embodiment 22, wherein the humectant comprises glycerol.
- Embodiment 24 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 23, further comprising one or more alkali metal salts, one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 25 The pouched product of Embodiment 24, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts are salts of organic acids.
- Embodiment 26 The pouched product of Embodiment 25, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt and/or magnesium salt.
- Embodiment 27 The pouched product of Embodiment 25, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt.
- Embodiment 28 The pouched product of Embodiment 27, wherein the calcium salt is selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and any combination thereof.
- the calcium salt is selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 29 The pouched product of Embodiment 28, wherein the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate.
- Embodiment 30 The pouched product of Embodiment 28, wherein the calcium salt is calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 31 The pouched product of Embodiment 30, wherein the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 32 The pouched product of Embodiment 30, wherein the calcium benzoate is formed in situ with calcium hydroxide and benzoic acid present in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof.
- Embodiment 33 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 24 to 32, wherein at least a portion of the one or more alkali metal salts of the one or more organic acids, one or more alkaline earth metal salts of the one or more organic acids, or any combination thereof is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine component in the form of an ion pair.
- Embodiment 34 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 33, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is present in the form of particles.
- Embodiment 35 The pouched product of Embodiment 34, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 25 microns to about 500 microns.
- Embodiment 36 The pouched product of Embodiment 35, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 200 microns to about 400 microns.
- Embodiment 37 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 36, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of less than about 5 microns.
- Embodiment 38 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 37, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of greater than about 1000 microns.
- Embodiment 39 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 38, wherein the particles exhibit a multimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 40 The pouched product of Embodiment 39, wherein the particles exhibit a bimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 41 The pouched product of Embodiment 40, wherein the bimodal particle size distribution comprises a first mode with a peak at about 75 to about 125 micrometers or about 80 to about 110 micrometers and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to about 1000 micrometers or about 700 to about 1000 micrometers.
- Embodiment 42 The pouched product of Embodiment 41, wherein more particles are present within the first mode than within the second mode.
- Embodiment 43 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 42, wherein the particles are uncoated.
- Embodiment 44 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 42, wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising one or more filling components and/or one or more pH adjusters.
- Embodiment 45 The pouched product of Embodiment 44, wherein the one or more filling components comprise mannitol and the one or more pH adjusters comprise sodium carbonate.
- Embodiment 46 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 45, wherein the pouched product has a total moisture content of about 48% or less, a total moisture content of about 40% or less, a total moisture content of about 30% or less, or a total moisture content of about 20% or less.
- Embodiment 47 The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 45, wherein the pouched product has a total moisture content of about 1% to about 40%, about 1% to about 30%, about 1% to about 20%, or about 1% to about 10%.
- Embodiment 48 A composition, comprising a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt, wherein the composition is in the form of a pouched product.
- Embodiment 49 The composition of Embodiment 48, wherein the first nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 2% to about 15% by weight and the second nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 0.5% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- Embodiment 50 The composition of Embodiment 48 or 49, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a higher weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 51 The composition of Embodiment 48 or 49, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a lower weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 52 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 51, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin.
- Embodiment 53 The composition of Embodiment 52, wherein the polymeric cation exchange resin comprises a polyacrylic polymer.
- Embodiment 54 The composition of Embodiment 52, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
- Embodiment 55 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is a tobacco-derived nicotine extract.
- Embodiment 56 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is synthetic nicotine.
- Embodiment 57 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 58 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 57, wherein at least a portion of the second nicotine component is in the form of a particulate non-tobacco material treated to contain the second nicotine component, and fibrous plant material carrying the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 59 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 58, wherein the composition comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of one or more additional fillers, binders, pH adjusters, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, and preservatives.
- Embodiment 60 The composition of Embodiment 59, wherein the composition comprises a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- Embodiment 61 The composition of Embodiment 60, wherein the composition comprises calcium hydroxide.
- Embodiment 62 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of about 7-9.
- Embodiment 63 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 6.5.
- Embodiment 64 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 5.
- Embodiment 65 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 64, wherein the composition comprises about 5% or more of a humectant.
- Embodiment 66 The composition of Embodiment 65, wherein the humectant comprises glycerol.
- Embodiment 67 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 66, further comprising one or more alkali metal salts, one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 68 The composition of Embodiment 67, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts are salts of organic acids.
- Embodiment 69 The composition of Embodiment 67 or 68, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or the one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt and/or a magnesium salt.
- Embodiment 70 The composition of Embodiment 69, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt.
- Embodiment 71 The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 72 The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate.
- Embodiment 73 The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 74 The composition of Embodiment 73, wherein the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 75 The composition of Embodiment 73, wherein the calcium benzoate is formed in situ with calcium hydroxide and benzoic acid present in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof.
- Embodiment 76 The composition of any of Embodiments 67 to 75, wherein at least a portion of the one or more alkali metal salts, the one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine component in the form of an ion pair.
- Embodiment 77 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 76, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is present in the form of particles.
- Embodiment 78 The composition of Embodiment 77, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 25 microns to about 500 microns.
- Embodiment 79 The composition of Embodiment 77, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 200 microns to about 400 microns.
- Embodiment 80 The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 79, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of less than about 5 microns.
- Embodiment 81 The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 79, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of greater than about 1000 microns.
- Embodiment 82 The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 81, wherein the particles exhibit a multimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 83 The composition of Embodiment 82, wherein the particles exhibit a bimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 84 The composition of Embodiment 83, wherein the bimodal particle size distribution comprises a first mode with a peak at about 75 to about 125 micrometers or about 80 to about 110 micrometers and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to about 1000 micrometers or about 700 to about 1000 micrometers.
- Embodiment 85 The composition of Embodiment 84, wherein more particles are present within the first mode than within the second mode.
- Embodiment 86 The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 85, wherein the particles are uncoated.
- Embodiment 87 The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 85, wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising one or more filling components and/or one or more pH adjusters.
- Embodiment 88 The composition of Embodiment 87, wherein the one or more filling components comprise mannitol and the one or more pH adjusters comprise sodium carbonate.
- Embodiment 89 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 88, wherein the composition has a total moisture content of about 40% or less, a total moisture content of about 30% or less, or a total moisture content of about 20% or less.
- Embodiment 90 The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 88, wherein the composition has a total moisture content of about 1% to about 40%, about 1% to about 30%, about 1% to about 20%, or about 1% to about 10%.
- Embodiment 91 A method of providing a pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 5% or greater.
- Embodiment 92 A method of providing a moist pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form oft a nicotine-polymer complex; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 25% or greater.
- Embodiment 93 A method of providing a pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of two or more different nicotine components, comprising: a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 5% or greater.
- Embodiment 94 A method of providing a moist pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of two or more different nicotine components, comprising: a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 25% or greater.
- FIG. 1 is a front perspective view illustrating a pouched product according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
- FIG. 2 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus pH for resin-bound nicotine in combination with sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide according to example embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 3 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus ionic strength for resin-bound nicotine in combination with various sodium and calcium salts according to example embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 4 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus ionic strength for resin-bound nicotine in combination with various salts and combinations of salts according to example embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 5 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine and pH values for resin bound nicotine in combination with various salts, and for pouched products according to example embodiments of the present disclosure.
- compositions and products of the disclosure generally comprise a nicotine-polymer complex.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole source of nicotine in the compositions and products.
- the compositions and products comprise at least two, different nicotine components (including a nicotine-polymer complex). It is noted that this disclosure is not intended to be limited thereto, and in some embodiments, such compositions and products can include more than two, different nicotine components (e.g., three, four, or more different nicotine components), including the nicotine-polymer complex.
- compositions and products configured for oral use.
- the term “configured for oral use” as used herein means that the product is provided in a form such that during use, saliva in the mouth of the user causes one or more of the components of the mixture (e.g., flavoring agents and/or nicotine) to pass into the mouth of the user.
- the product is adapted to deliver components to a user through mucous membranes in the user's mouth, the user's digestive system, or both and, in some instances, said component is an active ingredient (including, but not limited to, for example, nicotine) that can be absorbed through the mucous membranes in the mouth or absorbed through the digestive tract when the product is used.
- Certain compositions or products of the present disclosure may be dissolvable.
- dissolve refers to compositions having aqueous-soluble components that interact with moisture in the oral cavity and enter into solution, thereby causing gradual consumption of the composition.
- the dissolvable composition is capable of lasting in the user's mouth for a given period of time until it completely dissolves. Dissolution rates can vary over a wide range, from about 1 minute or less to about 60 minutes.
- fast release compositions typically dissolve and/or release the desired component(s) (e.g., active ingredient, flavor, and the like) in about 2 minutes or less, often about 1 minute or less (e.g., about 50 seconds or less, about 40 seconds or less, about 30 seconds or less, or about 20 seconds or less).
- Dissolution can occur by any means, such as melting, mechanical disruption (e.g., chewing), enzymatic or other chemical degradation, or by disruption of the interaction between the components of the composition.
- the products do not dissolve during the product's residence in the user's mouth.
- the disclosure provides products in the form of a mixture of one or more components (including a nicotine-polymer complex, as described further herein), disposed within a moisture-permeable container (e.g., a water-permeable pouch).
- Pouched products generally comprise, in addition to the pouch-based exterior, a mixture within the pouch that typically comprises (in addition to the two or more different nicotine components as described herein), one or more fillers, one or more flavorants, and various other optional ingredients.
- the composition of the material within the pouches provided herein is not particularly limited, and can comprise, in addition to the nicotine-polymer complex (alone or in combination with one or more different nicotine sources), any filling composition, including those included within conventional pouched produces.
- compositions are generally mixtures of two or more components and as such, the compositions are, in some cases, referenced herein below as “mixtures.”
- Certain components that can advantageously be included in the mixtures within certain embodiments of the pouches provided herein are outlined generally below; however, it is to be understood that the discussion is not intended to be limiting of the components that can be incorporated within the disclosed pouches.
- Such mixtures in the water-permeable pouch format are typically used by placing a pouch containing the mixture in the mouth of a human subject/user.
- the pouch is placed somewhere in the oral cavity of the user, for example under the lips, in the same way as moist snuff products are generally used.
- the pouch preferably is not chewed or swallowed. Exposure to saliva then causes some of the components of the mixture therein (e.g., flavoring agents and/or the nicotine) to pass through e.g., the water-permeable pouch and provide the user with flavor and satisfaction, and the user is not required to spit out any portion of the mixture.
- pouch materials for products described herein may be designed and manufactured such that under conditions of normal use, a significant amount of the contents of the formulation within the pouch permeate through the pouch material prior to the time that the pouch undergoes loss of its physical integrity.
- an example pouched product 10 can comprise an outer water-permeable container 20 in the form of a pouch which contains a particulate mixture 15 adapted for oral use (wherein particulate mixture 15 comprises a nicotine-polymer complex as described herein).
- particulate mixture 15 comprises a nicotine-polymer complex as described herein.
- the orientation, size, and type of outer water-permeable pouch and the type and nature of the composition adapted for oral use that are illustrated herein are not construed as limiting thereof.
- Certain examples of components incorporated within particulate mixture 15 are described herein below, followed by disclosure relating to suitable outer, water-permeable containers 20 to form pouched products 10.
- compositions and products which contain at least one nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole nicotine component within the composition and/or product.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is included in the composition or product along with one or more other types of nicotine components.
- nicotine component any suitable form of nicotine (e.g., free base or salt) for providing oral absorption of at least a portion of the nicotine present.
- Various nicotinic compounds, and methods for their administration, are set forth in US Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0274628 to Borschke, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- “nicotinic compound” often refers to naturally occurring or synthetic nicotinic compound unbound from a plant material, meaning the compound is at least partially purified and not contained within a plant structure, such as a tobacco leaf.
- the nicotine in some embodiments, is naturally occurring and obtained as an extract from a Nicotiana species (e.g., tobacco).
- the nicotine can be, for example, in the form of a highly purified tobacco extract.
- Various methods are known for the isolation and purification of nicotine from tobacco (including, but not limited to, extraction from tobacco with water; extraction from tobacco with organic solvents; steam distillation from tobacco; or pyrolytic degradation of tobacco and distillation of nicotine therefrom).
- extraction methods see for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,822,306 and 4,153,063 to Roselius et al. and US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2008/0302377 to Kauryzbaev et al., which are incorporated herein by reference.
- nicotine may be obtained from another source (e.g., another type of plant).
- nicotine may be synthetically made.
- the method by which synthetic nicotine used in some embodiments of the compositions and products described herein is synthesized can vary and is not particularly limited.
- Various methods for the preparation of nicotine are known. See, e.g., Florence L. Wagner et al., 63 Tetrahedron 8065 (2007); U.S. Pat. No. 10,913,962 to McCague et al.; and U.S. Patent App. Pub. No. 2020/0331884 to Weber et al., which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- the nicotine can have the enantiomeric form S( ⁇ )-nicotine, R(+)-nicotine, or a mixture of S( ⁇ )-nicotine and R(+)-nicotine.
- the nicotine is in the form of S( ⁇ )-nicotine (e.g., in a form that is virtually all S( ⁇ )-nicotine) or a racemic mixture composed primarily or predominantly of S( ⁇ )-nicotine (e.g., a mixture composed of about 95 weight parts S( ⁇ )-nicotine and about 5 weight parts R(+)-nicotine).
- the nicotine is employed in virtually pure form or in an essentially pure form. Highly preferred nicotine that is employed has a purity of greater than about 95 percent, more preferably greater than about 98 percent, and most preferably greater than about 99 percent, on a weight basis.
- compositions and products according to the present disclosure generally comprise at least one nicotine component that is a nicotine-polymer complex.
- a polymeric resin e.g., a polymeric ion-exchange resin, e.g., a polymeric cation exchange resin
- a polymethacrilic acid such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 3,901,248 to Lichtneckert et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Another example is a nicotine-polyacrylic carbomer complex, such as Carbopol 974P.
- nicotine may be present in the form of a nicotine polyacrylic complex.
- a suitable nicotine-polymer complex is nicotine polacrilex, which comprises nicotine bound to a resin prepared from methacrylic acid and divinyl benzene. Nicotine polacrilex is available in varying nicotine percentages, e.g., 18% to 20% nicotine; although not limited thereto, nicotine polacrilex generally comprises not less than 95% of the labeled amount of nicotine, calculated on an anhydrous basis.
- inclusion of a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex can lead to improved shelf-life stability and better/slower release of the nicotine from the composition/product.
- inclusion of a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex can lead to less burn in the oral cavity during use.
- the amount of nicotine provided by the nicotine-polymer complex can vary from about 5%, about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, or about 60% to about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100%, based on the total weight of nicotine provided from all nicotine components within a given composition.
- nicotine-polymer complex including resin and nicotine
- amounts of nicotine-polymer complex (including resin and nicotine) incorporated within a given composition can range, e.g., from about 0.5% by weight to about 15% by weight, e.g., about 1% by weight to about 10% by weight, e.g., about 2% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of a composition/mixture to be included within a pouched product.
- the particle size of the nicotine-polymer complex can be intentionally selected.
- the values provided below as example embodiments of nicotine-polymer complex particle sizes and distributions are based on sieving and/or light scattering measurements as generally known in the art for particle size evaluation.
- size distribution measurements can be conducted based on mesh size, using, e.g., a RO-TAP® sieve shaker, as described at hub.wstyler.com/rotap-guide (last accessed Aug. 22, 2022), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the nicotine-polymer complex within the disclosed compositions and products has an average particle size of at least about 1 micrometer, at least about 5 micrometers, at least about 10 micrometers, at least about 25 micrometers, at least about 50 micrometers, at least about 100 micrometers, at least about 150 micrometers, at least about 200 micrometers, at least about 250 micrometers, at least about 300 micrometers, at least about 350 micrometers, at least about 400 micrometers, or at least about 450 micrometers.
- the nicotine-polymer complex within the disclosed compositions and products has an average particle size of less than about 800 micrometers, less than about 750 micrometers, less than about 700 micrometers, less than about 650 micrometers, less than about 600 micrometers, less than about 550 micrometers, less than about 500 micrometers, less than about 450 micrometers, less than about 400 micrometers, less than about 350 micrometers, less than about 300 micrometers, less than about 250 micrometers, less than about 200 micrometers, less than about 150 micrometers, less than about 100 micrometers, less than about 50 micrometers, or less than about 25 micrometers.
- the average particle size is about 25 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 50 microns to about 500 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 250 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, or about 200 microns to about 250 microns.
- a minimum particle size is about 0.1 micron or greater, such as about 0.2 micron or greater. In some embodiments, any particles with sizes smaller than about 5 microns are present in a volume percentage of less than 1%, less than 0.5%, less than 0.25%, or less than 0.1%, based on the total volume of nicotine-polymer complex particles. In some embodiments, a maximum particle size is about 5000 micrometers or lower. In some embodiments, any particles with sizes larger than 1000 microns are present in a volume percentage of less than 1.2%, less than 1.1%, or less than 1%.
- the particle sizes of the nicotine-polymer complex particles exhibit a multimodal, e.g., bimodal distribution.
- the particles exhibit a first mode with a peak of about 75 to 125 micrometers, e.g., about 80 to about 110 microns and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to 1000 micrometers, e.g., about 700 to about 1000 micrometers.
- the first mode is the primary mode.
- the nicotine-polymer complex particles are employed as uncoated particles (consisting essentially of the nicotine-polymer complex). In other embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex particles are partially or wholly coated/encapsulated with one or more coatings and/or outer shells. For example, in certain embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex particles are encapsulated with one or more polyols and one or more pH adjusters. In one particular embodiment, nicotine-polymer complex particles are provided which are coated or encapsulated with a combination of mannitol and sodium carbonate. Certain such encapsulated nicotine-polymer complex particles may have an average particle size of from about 350 microns to about 500 microns.
- the nicotine-polymer complex can be used alone or in combination with one or more additional nicotine components.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole nicotine source in a given composition or product.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is one of two (or more) nicotine sources in a given composition or product.
- the nicotine-polymer complex is referred to as a “first nicotine component,” and the composition/product further comprises one or more additional nicotine components (e.g., a “second nicotine component”), which are different from the first nicotine component.
- a second (and/or third, fourth, fifth, etc., where applicable) nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of unbound nicotine, in the form of nicotine free base or a nicotine salt.
- unbound nicotine is meant that the nicotine is not intentionally added to the composition in the form of nicotine bound within a resin.
- the nicotine free base or nicotine salt can be employed alone, i.e., in the form of an extract or other purified material.
- the nicotine free base or nicotine salt can be adsorbed in for example, a microcrystalline cellulose material to form a microcrystalline cellulose-nicotine carrier complex.
- This second nicotine component can be nicotine is in its free base form. See, for example, the discussion of nicotine in free base form in US Pat. Pub. No. 2004/0191322 to Hansson, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the second nicotine component can alternatively be, for example, nicotine in the form of a salt, e.g., a salt with one or more organic acids. Salts of nicotine can be provided using the types of ingredients and techniques set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 2,033,909 to Cox et al. and Perfetti, Beitrage Tabak Kauaba Int., 12: 43-54 (1983), which are incorporated herein by reference. Additionally, salts of nicotine are available from sources such as Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc.
- nicotine salt encompasses forms of nicotine and at least one other coformer, wherein both nicotine and coformer are in ionic form (nicotine salt); forms of nicotine and at least one other coformer, wherein both nicotine and coformer are in neutral form (nicotine co-crystal); and hybrid bonding structures with both salt and co-crystal characteristics (nicotine salt-co-crystals), unless the context dictates otherwise.
- the second nicotine component is, in some embodiments, selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base, a nicotine salt such as hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, monotartrate, bitartrate, sulfate, salicylate, and nicotine zinc chloride.
- the second nicotine component is a purified nicotine extract from tobacco.
- the second nicotine component is pharmaceutical grade (e.g., USP) nicotine.
- the second nicotine component can, in some embodiments, be incorporated within a composition/product in the form of an aqueous solution and the concentration of nicotine contained therein can vary; in some embodiments, a solution with a concentration of nicotine of about 7% to about 25% by weight can be used. Calculations of the required amount of solution to be added will require consideration of the concentration and the desired content of the second nicotine component within the final composition/product.
- the amount of the second nicotine component, where included, can vary and may depend, in part, on the exact form of the second nicotine component (e.g., nicotine free base or nicotine salt). In some embodiments, the amount of nicotine provided by the second nicotine component where included can vary from 0%, about 5%, about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, or about 60% to about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95%, or about 98%, based on the total weight of all nicotine components within a given composition.
- amounts of the second nicotine component incorporated within a given composition can range, e.g., from about 0.01% by weight to about 10% by weight, e.g., about 0.1 to about 1.5% by weight, about 0.5% by weight to about 5% by weight, about 1% to about 5% by weight, or about 0.5% to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of a mixture to be included within a pouched product.
- the ratio of the first nicotine component to the second nicotine component (where present) in the compositions and products provided herein can vary.
- the compositions and products comprise nicotine wholly or primarily in the form of the first nicotine component; in some embodiments, the compositions and products comprise nicotine primarily in the form of the second nicotine component.
- the first and second nicotine components are provided in roughly equivalent amounts by weight.
- compositions wherein 100% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex compositions wherein 50% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and 50% of the nicotine is in the form of nicotine free base or salt; and compositions wherein 80% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and 20% of the nicotine is in the form of nicotine free base or salt, as well as all ranges there between.
- a pouch including a composition which comprises about 5 mg to about 25 mg nicotine, e.g., about 5 mg nicotine to about 20 mg nicotine, and about 10 mg nicotine to about 15 mg nicotine.
- Certain, non-limiting examples of pouch compositions comprise about 5 mg nicotine per pouch, about 10 mg nicotine per pouch, about 15 mg nicotine per pouch, or about 20 mg nicotine per pouch.
- Certain specific embodiments comprise about 2 to about 4% nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component; about 3 to about 5% nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component; and about 8 to about 10% of the nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component, all on a weight basis based on the entirety of the composition, e.g., as included within a pouched product.
- At least a portion of the one or more of the nicotine components in the compositions and products provided herein are associated, by ion pairing, with one or more organic acids.
- at least a portion of the basic amine is associated with at least a portion of the organic acid or the alkali metal salt thereof.
- the nicotine component(s) present in the composition can exist in multiple forms, including ion paired, in solution (i.e., fully solvated), as the free base, as a cation, as a salt, or any combination thereof.
- the association between the nicotine and at least a portion of the organic acid or an alkali metal salt or alkaline earth metal salt thereof is in the form of an ion pair between the basic amine and a conjugate base of the organic acid.
- Ion pairing describes the partial association of oppositely charged ions in relatively concentrated solutions to form distinct chemical species called ion pairs.
- the strength of the association depends on the electrostatic force of attraction between the positive and negative ions (i.e., protonated basic amine and the conjugate base of the organic acid).
- conjugate base is meant the base resulting from deprotonation of the corresponding acid (e.g., benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid).
- benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid
- the nicotine and the conjugate base of the organic acid exist at least partially in the form of an ion pair.
- ion pairing may minimize chemical degradation of the nicotine and/or enhance the oral availability of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine).
- ion pairing may also enhance release of nicotine from oral compositions as disclosed herein when nicotine is present in a resin-bound form.
- the extent of ion pairing in the disclosed compositions may vary based on, for example, pH, the nature of the organic acid, the concentration of basic amine (e.g., nicotine), the concentration of the organic acid or conjugate base of the organic acid present in the composition, the moisture content of the composition, the ionic strength of the composition, and the like.
- ion pairing is an equilibrium process influenced by the foregoing variables. Accordingly, quantification of the extent of ion pairing is difficult or impossible by calculation or direct observation.
- ion pairing may be demonstrated through surrogate measures such as partitioning between octanol and water or membrane permeation of aqueous solutions of e.g., nicotine plus organic acids and/or their conjugate bases.
- surrogate measures such as partitioning between octanol and water or membrane permeation of aqueous solutions of e.g., nicotine plus organic acids and/or their conjugate bases.
- an octanol-water partitioning favoring distribution of a basic amine-organic acid ion pair into octanol is predictive of good absorption of the basic amine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
- the composition comprises an organic acid.
- organic acid refers to an organic (i.e., carbon-based) compound that is characterized by acidic properties.
- organic acids are relatively weak acids (i.e., they do not dissociate completely in the presence of water), such as carboxylic acids (—CO 2 H) or sulfonic acids (—SO 2 OH).
- reference to organic acid means an organic acid that is intentionally added.
- an organic acid may be intentionally added as a specific composition ingredient as opposed to merely being inherently present as a component of another composition ingredient (e.g., the small amount of organic acid which may inherently be present in a composition ingredient, such as a tobacco material).
- Suitable organic acids will typically have a range of lipophilicities (i.e., a polarity giving an appropriate balance of water and organic solubility). Lipophilicity is conveniently measured in terms of logP, the partition coefficient of a molecule between a lipophilic phase and an aqueous phase (usually water). Typically, the lipophilic phase is octanol, although other lipophilic solvents may also be used.
- logP means the partition coefficient between octanol and water.
- a logD value herein means a logD obtained by partition between octanol and water (buffered to be at a specific pH value).
- a logP (or logD) favoring distribution of a nicotine-organic acid ion pair into the lipophilic phase is predictive of good absorption of the nicotine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
- lipophilicities of suitable organic acids will vary between about 1 and about 12 (more soluble in octanol than in water).
- the organic acid has a logP value from about 1 to about 12, e.g., from about 1.0. about 1.5, about 2.0, about 2.5, about 3.0, about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, about 5.0, about 5.5, about 6.0, about 6.5, about 7.0, about 7.5, or about 8.0, to about 8.5, about 9.0, about 9.5, about 10.0, about 10.5, about 11.0, about 11.5, or about 12.0.
- moderately lipophilic organic acids e.g., logP of from about 1.4 to about 4.5
- produce ion pairs with nicotine which are of a polarity providing good octanol-water partitioning of the ion pair, and hence partitioning of nicotine, into octanol versus water.
- partitioning into octanol is predictive of favorable oral availability.
- the organic acid has a logP value from about 3.0 to about 8.0, about 10.0, or even 12.0.
- certain solvents or solubilizing agents e.g., inclusion in the composition of glycerin or propylene glycol
- solubilizing agents may be beneficial in solubilizing organic acids and the corresponding salts or ion pairs thereof with the basic amine for highly lipophilic organic acids (e.g., higher than about 4.5).
- the organic acid is a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid.
- the carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid functional group may be attached to any alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group having, for example, from one to twenty carbon atoms (C 1 -C 20 ).
- the organic acid is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl carboxylic or sulfonic acid.
- alkyl refers to any straight chain or branched chain hydrocarbon.
- the alkyl group may be saturated (i.e., having all spa carbon atoms), or may be unsaturated (i.e., having at least one site of unsaturation).
- unsaturated refers to the presence of a carbon-carbon, sp 2 double bond in one or more positions within the alkyl group.
- Unsaturated alkyl groups may be mono- or polyunsaturated.
- Representative straight chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, and n-hexyl.
- Branched chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, and 2-methylbutyl.
- Representative unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, and the like.
- An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- Cycloalkyl refers to a carbocyclic group, which may be mono- or bicyclic. Cycloalkyl groups include rings having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle or 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle. Examples of monocyclic cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted, and may include one or more sites of unsaturation (e.g., cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl).
- aryl refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group. Examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl and naphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- Heteroaryl and “heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refer to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system, respectively, in which one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
- the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group comprises up to 20 carbon atoms and from 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S.
- a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (for example, 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (for example, 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S), for example: a bicyclo[4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system.
- heteroaryl groups include by way of example and not limitation, pyridyl, thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-car
- heterocycloalkyls include by way of example and not limitation, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, bis-tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, piperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and morpholinyl. Heteroaryl and heterocycloalkyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- “Substituted” as used herein and as applied to any of the above alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, means that one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a substituent.
- Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, —Cl, Br, F, alkyl, —OH, —OCH 3 , NH 2 , —NHCH 3 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —CN, —NC( ⁇ O)CH 3 , —C( ⁇ O)—, —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 , and —C( ⁇ O)N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- a group is described as “optionally substituted,” that group can be substituted with one or more of the above substituents, independently selected for each occasion.
- the substituent may be one or more methyl groups or one or more hydroxyl groups.
- the organic acid is an alkyl carboxylic acid.
- alkyl carboxylic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, heptanoic acid, octanoic acid, nonanoic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, dodecanoic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, and the like.
- the organic acid is an alkyl sulfonic acid.
- Non-limiting examples of alkyl sulfonic acids include propanesulfonic acid, heptanesulfonic acid, and octanesulfonic acid.
- the alkyl carboxylic or sulfonic acid is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
- Non-limiting examples include glycolic acid, 4-hydroxybutyric acid, and lactic acid.
- an organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group or more than one sulfonic acid group (e.g., two, three, or more carboxylic acid groups).
- Non-limiting examples include oxalic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, and glutaric acid.
- one or more of the carboxylic acid groups may be esterified.
- Non-limiting examples include succinic acid monoethyl ester, monomethyl fumarate, monomethyl or dimethyl citrate, and the like.
- the organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group and one or more hydroxyl groups.
- Non-limiting examples of such acids include tartaric acid, citric acid, and the like.
- the organic acid is an aryl carboxylic acid or an aryl sulfonic acid.
- Non-limiting examples of aryl carboxylic and sulfonic acids include benzoic acid, toluic acids, salicylic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.
- organic acids which may be useful in certain embodiments include 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid (L), aspartic acid (L), alpha-methylbutyric acid, camphoric acid (+), camphor-10-sulfonic acid (+), cinnamic acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane-1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, furoic acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, glucoheptonic acid, gluconic acid, glucuronic acid, glutamic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, isobutyric acid, isovaleric acid, lactobionic acid, lauric acid, levulinic acid, malic acid,
- suitable acids include, but are not limited to, the list of organic acids in Table 1
- Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids Acid Name logP benzoic acid 1.9 phenylacetic 1.4 p-toluic acid 2.3 ethyl benzoic acid 2.9 isopropyl benzoic acid 3.5 4-phenylbutyric 2.4 2-napthoxyacetic acid 2.5 napthylacetic acid 2.7 heptanoic acid 2.5 octanoic acid 3.05 nonanoic acid 3.5 decanoic acid 4.09 9-deceneoic acid 3.3 2-deceneoic acid 3.8 10-undecenoic acid 3.9 dodecandioic acid 3.2 dodecanoic acid 4.6 myristic acid 5.3 palmitic acid 6.4 stearic acid 7.6 cyclohexanebutanoic acid 3.4 1-heptanesulfonic acid 2.0 1-octanesulfonic acid 2.5 1-nonanesulfonic acid 3.1 monooctyl succinate 2.8 tocopherol succinate 10.2 monomenthyl succinate
- the organic acid is a mono ester of a di- or poly-acid, such as mono-octyl succinate, mono-octyl fumarate, or the like.
- the organic acid is a mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid or a poly-carboxylic acid.
- the dicarboxylic acid is malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof.
- the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof.
- the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, or a combination thereof.
- the alcohol forming the mono ester of the dicarboxylic acid is a lipophilic alcohol.
- suitable lipophilic alcohols include, but are not limited to, octanol, menthol, and tocopherol.
- the organic acid is an octyl mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid, such as monooctyl succinate, monooctyl fumarate, or the like.
- the organic acid is a monomenthyl ester of a dicarboxylic acid.
- Certain menthyl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the cooling sensation they may provide upon use of the product comprising the composition.
- the organic acid is monomenthyl succinate, monomenthyl fumarate, monomenthyl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
- the organic acid is a monotocopheryl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain tocopheryl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the antioxidant effects they may provide.
- the organic acid is tocopheryl succinate, tocopheryl fumarate, tocopheryl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
- the organic acid is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids.
- Carotenoids are tetraterpenes, meaning that they are produced from 8 isoprene molecules and contain 40 carbon atoms. Accordingly, they are usually lipophilic due to the presence of long unsaturated aliphatic chains, and are generally yellow, orange, or red in color.
- Certain carotenoid derivatives can be advantageous in oral compositions by virtue of providing both ion pairing and serving as a colorant in the composition.
- the organic acid is 2E,4E, 6E, 8E, 10E,12E,14E,16Z,18E)-20-methoxy-4, 8,13,17-tetramethyl-20-oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenoic acid (bixin) or an isomer thereof.
- Bixin is an apocarotenoid found in annatto seeds from the achiote tree ( Bixa orellana ), and is the naturally occurring pigment providing the reddish orange color to annatto.
- Bixin is soluble in fats and alcohols but insoluble in water, and is chemically unstable when isolated, converting via isomerization into the double bond isomer, trans-bixin ( ⁇ -bixin), having the structure:
- the organic acid is (2E,4E, 6E, 8E, 10E, 12E, 14E, 16E, 18E)-4,8,13,17-tetramethylicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid (norbixin), a water soluble hydrolysis product of bixin having the structure:
- organic acid may further depend on additional properties in addition to or without consideration to the logP value.
- an organic acid should be one recognized as safe for human consumption, and which has acceptable flavor, odor, volatility, stability, and the like. Determination of appropriate organic acids is within the purview of one of skill in the art.
- the organic acid is benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, or octanoic acid.
- the organic acid is benzoic acid, octanoic acid, or decanoic acid.
- the organic acid is octanoic acid.
- the organic acid is benzoic acid.
- more than one organic acid may be present.
- the composition may comprise two, or three, or four, or more organic acids.
- an organic acid contemplates mixtures of two or more organic acids.
- the relative amounts of the multiple organic acids may vary.
- a composition may comprise equal amounts of two, or three, or more organic acids, or may comprise different relative amounts.
- certain organic acids e.g., citric acid or myristic acid which have a logP value outside the desired range, when combined with other organic acids to provide the desired average logP range for the combination.
- organic acids in the composition may be desirable to include organic acids in the composition which have logP values outside the desired range for purposes such as, but not limited to, providing desirable organoleptic properties, stability, as flavor components, and the like.
- certain lipophilic organic acids have undesirable flavor and or aroma characteristics which would preclude their presence as the sole organic acid (e.g., in equimolar or greater quantities relative to nicotine).
- a combination of different organic acids may provide desirable ion pairing while the concentration of any single organic acid in the composition remains below the threshold which would be found objectionable from a sensory perspective.
- the organic acid may comprise from about 1 to about 5 or more molar equivalents of benzoic acid relative to the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), combined with e.g., about 0.2 molar equivalents of octanoic acid or a salt thereof, and 0.2 molar equivalents of decanoic acid or a salt thereof.
- the basic amine-containing active ingredient e.g., nicotine
- the organic acid is a combination of any two organic acids selected from the group consisting of benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, and octanoic acid.
- the organic acid is a combination of benzoic acid, octanoic acid, and decanoic acid, or benzoic and octanoic acid.
- the composition comprises citric acid in addition to one or more of benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, and octanoic acid.
- the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid or an alkaline earth metal salt of an organic acid.
- the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt or an alkaline earth metal salt.
- Suitable alkali metals include lithium, sodium, and potassium.
- the alkali metal is sodium or potassium.
- the alkali metal is sodium.
- the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid.
- the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid or an alkaline earth metal salt of an organic acid.
- the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt or an alkaline earth metal salt.
- Suitable alkali metals include lithium, sodium, and potassium.
- the alkali metal is sodium or potassium.
- the alkali metal is sodium.
- the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid.
- Suitable alkaline earth metals include, but are not limited to, magnesium and calcium.
- the composition comprises an organic acid and a calcium salt of the organic acid.
- multivalent cations such as calcium or magnesium ions, provided by a calcium or magnesium salt, respectively, of an organic acid, or alternatively or in addition by an inorganic calcium or magnesium salt, described further herein below, may increase the ionic strength of the composition.
- compositions comprising nicotine polacrilex and certain calcium salts achieved greater release of nicotine from nicotine polacrilex than achieved in the absence of such salts.
- Suitable calcium salts of organic acids include, but are not limited to, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and combinations thereof.
- inorganic calcium salts e.g., calcium chloride or magnesium chloride
- alkali metal salts e.g., sodium chloride or potassium chloride
- Certain such calcium salts are particularly advantageous, e.g., as they are food grade additives with neutral taste.
- inclusion of such calcium salts advantageously provides enhanced properties, e.g., as shown in Example 5/ FIG. 4 , such as enhanced nicotine release, as well as logD, great low pH.
- the composition comprises benzoic acid and sodium benzoate, octanoic acid and sodium octanoate, decanoic acid and sodium decanoate, or a combination thereof.
- the composition comprises benzoic acid and sodium benzoate.
- the composition comprises sodium benzoate.
- the composition comprises calcium benzoate.
- the composition comprises a mixture of sodium benzoate and calcium benzoate.
- the composition comprises calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof, either alone or in combination with a sodium salt of an organic acid, such as sodium benzoate.
- the ratio of the organic acid to the salt of the organic acid is from about 0.1 to about 10, such as from about 0.1, about 0.25, about 0.3, about 0.5, about 0.75, or about 1, to about 2, about 5, or about 10.
- both an organic acid and the salt thereof are added to the other components of the composition, wherein the organic acid is added in excess of the salt, in equimolar quantities with the salt, or as a fraction of the salt (e.g., sodium salt).
- the relative amounts will be determined by the desired pH of the composition, as well as the desired ionic strength.
- the organic acid may be added in a quantity to provide a desired pH level of the composition, while the alkali metal (e.g., sodium) salt is added in a quantity to provide the desired extent of ion pairing.
- the quantity of organic acid (i.e., the protonated form) present in the composition, relative to the alkali metal salt or conjugate base form present in the composition will vary according to the pH of the composition and the pKa of the organic acid, as well as according to the actual relative quantities initially added to the composition.
- the amount of organic acid or salt thereof present in the composition may vary. Generally, as the concentration of the organic acid (or the conjugate base thereof) increases, the percent of basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) that is ion paired with the organic acid increases. This typically increases the partitioning of the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), in the form of an ion pair, into octanol versus water as measured by the logP (the log 10 of the partitioning coefficient).
- the composition comprises from about 0.05, about 0.1, about 1, about 1.5, about 2, or about 5, to about 10, about 15, or about 20 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), calculated as the free base amine-containing active ingredient.
- the basic amine-containing active ingredient e.g., nicotine
- the composition comprises from about 1 to about 10, or from about 2 to about 5 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof, to nicotine, on a free-base nicotine basis.
- the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof is present in a molar ratio with the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) from about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5, to about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, or about 10.
- the basic amine-containing active ingredient e.g., nicotine
- the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 3.0 to about 9.5, such as from about 3.0 to about 9.0, or from about 3.0 to about 8.5, or from about 3.0 to about 8.0, or from about 3.5 to about 7.5, or from about 4.5 to about 7.0, or from about 5.5 to about 7.0, or from about 4.0 to about 5.5, or from about 6.0 to about 9.0, or from about 7.0 to about 9.5.
- the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of about 3.0, about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, about 5.0, about 5.5, about 6.0, about 6.5, about 7.0, about 7.5, about 8.0, about 8.5, or about 9.0.
- the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 4.5, about 5.0, or about 5.5, to about 6.0, or about 6.5.
- the organic acid is provided in a quantity sufficient to provide a pH of the composition of from about 5.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0, to about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, or about 6.5.
- a mineral acid e.g., hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, or the like
- hydrochloric acid e.g., hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, or the like
- a buffer such as carbonate or bicarbonate, are added to adjust and/or maintain the desired pH value.
- Other suitable buffers are described further herein below.
- the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
- the salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
- the organic acid and the basic amine-containing active ingredient e.g., nicotine
- the organic acid and the basic amine-containing active ingredient are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such.
- the organic acid and basic amine-containing active ingredient e.g., nicotine
- the organic acid and basic amine-containing active ingredient are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
- the composition further comprises a solubility enhancer to increase the solubility of one or more of the organic acid or salt thereof.
- Suitable solubility enhancers include, but are not limited to, humectants as described herein such as glycerin or propylene glycol.
- the material within the pouches as described herein typically includes at least one particulate filler component.
- particulate filler components may fulfill multiple functions, such as enhancing certain organoleptic properties such as texture and mouthfeel, enhancing cohesiveness or compressibility of the product, and the like.
- the filler components are particulate materials and are cellulose-based.
- suitable particulate filler components are any non-tobacco plant material or derivative thereof, including cellulose materials derived from such sources.
- cellulosic non-tobacco plant material examples include cereal grains (e.g., maize, oat, barley, rye, buckwheat, and the like), sugar beet (e.g., FIBREX® brand filler available from International Fiber Corporation), bran fiber, and mixtures thereof.
- Non-limiting examples of derivatives of non-tobacco plant material include starches (e.g., from potato, wheat, rice, corn), natural cellulose, and modified cellulosic materials.
- Additional examples of potential particulate filler components include maltodextrin, dextrose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, lactose, mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol. Combinations of fillers can also be used.
- Starch as used herein may refer to pure starch from any source, modified starch, or starch derivatives. Starch is present, typically in granular form, in almost all green plants and in various types of plant tissues and organs (e.g., seeds, leaves, rhizomes, roots, tubers, shoots, fruits, grains, and stems). Starch can vary in composition, as well as in granular shape and size. Often, starch from different sources has different chemical and physical characteristics. A specific starch can be selected for inclusion in the mixture based on the ability of the starch material to impart a specific organoleptic property to composition. Starches derived from various sources can be used.
- starch major sources include cereal grains (e.g., rice, wheat, and maize) and root vegetables (e.g., potatoes and cassava).
- sources of starch include acorns, arrowroot, arracacha, bananas, barley, beans (e.g., favas, lentils, mung beans, peas, chickpeas), breadfruit, buckwheat, canna , chestnuts, colacasia, katakuri, kudzu, malanga, millet, oats, oca, Polynesian arrowroot, sago, sorghum, sweet potato, quinoa , rye, tapioca, taro, tobacco, water chestnuts, and yams.
- cereal grains e.g., rice, wheat, and maize
- root vegetables e.g., potatoes and cassava.
- Other examples of sources of starch include acorns, arrowroot, arracacha, bananas,
- modified starches are modified starches.
- a modified starch has undergone one or more structural modifications, often designed to alter its high heat properties.
- Some starches have been developed by genetic modifications, and are considered to be “genetically modified” starches.
- Other starches are obtained and subsequently physically (e.g., heat, cool water swelling, etc.), chemically, or enzymatically modified.
- modified starches can be starches that have been subjected to chemical reactions, such as esterification, etherification, oxidation, depolymerization (thinning) by acid catalysis or oxidation in the presence of base, bleaching, transglycosylation and depolymerization (e.g., dextrinization in the presence of a catalyst), cross-linking, acetylation, hydroxypropylation, and/or partial hydrolysis.
- Enzymatic treatment includes subjecting native starches to enzyme isolates or concentrates, microbial enzymes, and/or enzymes native to plant materials, e.g., amylase present in corn kernels to modify corn starch.
- modified starches are modified by heat treatments, such as pregelatinization, dextrinization, and/or cold water swelling processes.
- Certain modified starches include monostarch phosphate, distarch glycerol, distarch phosphate esterified with sodium trimetaphosphate, phosphate distarch phosphate, acetylated distarch phosphate, starch acetate esterified with acetic anhydride, starch acetate esterified with vinyl acetate, acetylated distarch adipate, acetylated distarch glycerol, hydroxypropyl starch, hydroxypropyl distarch glycerol, starch sodium octenyl succinate.
- the particulate filler component is a cellulose material or cellulose derivative.
- One particularly suitable particulate filler component for use in the products described herein is microcrystalline cellulose (“MCC”).
- MCC microcrystalline cellulose
- the MCC may be synthetic or semi-synthetic, or it may be obtained entirely from natural celluloses.
- the MCC may be selected from the group consisting of AVICEL® grades PH-100, PH-102, PH-103, PH-105, PH-112, PH-113, PH-200, PH-300, PH-302, VIVACEL® grades 101, 102, 12, 20 and EMOCEL® grades 50M and 90M, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
- the mixture comprises MCC as the particulate filler component.
- the quantity of MCC present in the mixture as described herein may vary according to the desired properties.
- the amount of particulate filler component can vary, but is typically up to about 75 percent of the material contained within the pouch by weight (i.e., the mixture), based on the total weight of the mixture.
- a typical range of particulate filler material (e.g., MCC) within the mixture can be from about 10 to about 75 percent by total weight of the mixture, for example, from about 10, about 15, about 20, about 25, or about 30, to about 35, about 40, about 45, or about 50 weight percent (e.g., about 20 to about 50 weight percent, about 25 to about 45 weight percent, or about 50 to about 80 weight percent or about 60 to about 80 weight percent).
- the amount of particulate filler material is at least about 10 percent by weight, such as at least about 20 percent, or at least about 25 percent, or at least about 30 percent, or at least about 35 percent, or at least about 40 percent, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- the particulate filler component further comprises a cellulose derivative or a combination of such derivatives.
- the mixture comprises from about 1 to about 10% of the cellulose derivative by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture, with certain embodiments comprising about 1 to about 5% by weight of cellulose derivative.
- the cellulose derivative is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers), meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group.
- Non-limiting examples of such cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose (“HPC”), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (“HPMC”), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose (“CMC”).
- the cellulose derivative is one or more of methylcellulose, HPC, HPMC, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and CMC.
- the cellulose derivative is HPC.
- the mixture comprises from about 0% to about 5% HPC by weight, e.g., about 1% to about 3% HPC by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- the composition comprises, as a filler, a byproduct of a pulping process, such as citrus rinds. In some embodiments, the composition comprises, as a filler, wheat straw.
- Such fillers can be used in combination with any of the types of particulate fillers referenced herein above.
- the water content of the mixture within the pouched product described herein, prior to use by a consumer of the product, may vary according to the desired properties.
- the mixture, as present within the product prior to insertion into the mouth of the user is less than about 60 percent by weight of water, and generally is from about 1 to about 60% by weight of water, for example, from about 5 to about 55, about 10 to about 50, about 20 to about 45, or about 25 to about 40 percent water by weight, including water amounts of at least about 5% by weight, at least about 10% by weight, at least about 15% by weight, and at least about 20% by weight.
- the mixture comprises a lower water content than some conventional mixtures for inclusion within a pouched product.
- the mixture comprises water in an amount of up to about 25% by weight or up to about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- the water content of the particulate composition is about 1% to about 12% by weight, such as less than about 8%, less than about 7%, less than about 6%, less than about 5%, or less than about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the particulate composition.
- Example embodiments can include water in an amount of about 15% to about 25%, e.g., about 17% to about 20%.
- flavoring agent or “flavorant” is any flavorful or aromatic substance capable of altering the sensory characteristics associated with the oral product.
- sensory characteristics that can be modified by the flavoring agent include taste, mouthfeel, moistness, coolness/heat, and/or fragrance/aroma.
- Flavoring agents may be natural or synthetic, and the character of the flavors imparted thereby may be described, without limitation, as fresh, sweet, herbal, confectionary, floral, fruity, or spicy.
- flavors include, but are not limited to, vanilla, coffee, chocolate/cocoa, cream, mint, spearmint, menthol, peppermint, wintergreen, eucalyptus , lavender, cardamon, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, cascarilla, sandalwood, honey, jasmine, ginger, anise, sage, licorice, lemon, orange, apple, peach, lime, cherry, strawberry, trigeminal sensates, melatonin, terpenes, and any combinations thereof. See also, Leffingwell et al., Tobacco Flavoring for Smoking Products, R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company (1972), which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Flavorings also may include components that are considered moistening, cooling or smoothening agents, such as eucalyptus . These flavors may be provided neat (i.e., alone) or in a composite, and may be employed as concentrates or flavor packages (e.g., spearmint and menthol, orange and cinnamon; lime, pineapple, and the like). Representative types of components also are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 5,387,416 to White et al.; US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2005/0244521 to Strickland et al.; and PCT Application Pub. No. WO 05/041699 to Quinter et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In some instances, the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form.
- the flavoring agent generally comprises at least one volatile flavor component.
- volatile refers to a chemical substance that forms a vapor readily at ambient temperatures (i.e., a chemical substance that has a high vapor pressure at a given temperature relative to a nonvolatile substance).
- a volatile flavor component has a molecular weight below about 400 Da, and often include at least one carbon-carbon double bond, carbon-oxygen double bond, or both.
- the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof.
- Non-limiting examples of aldehydes include vanillin, ethyl vanillin, p-anisaldehyde, hexanal, furfural, isovaleraldehyde, cuminaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and citronellal.
- Non-limiting examples of ketones include 1-hydroxy-2-propanone and 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-cyclopentenone-1-one.
- Non-limiting examples of esters include allyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, ethyl hexanoate, isoamyl acetate, and 3-methylbutyl acetate.
- Non-limiting examples of terpenes include sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, nerolidol, thuj one, myrcene, geraniol, nerol, citronellol, linalool, and eucalyptol.
- the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more of ethyl vanillin, cinnamaldehyde, sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, or citral.
- the at least one volatile flavor component comprises ethyl vanillin.
- the amount of flavoring agent utilized in the mixture can vary, but is typically up to about 10 weight percent, and certain embodiments are characterized by a flavoring agent content of at least about 0.1 weight percent, such as about 0.5 to about 10 weight percent, about 1 to about 6 weight percent, or about 2 to about 5 weight percent, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- the amount of flavoring agent present within the mixture may vary over a period of time (e.g., during a period of storage after preparation of the mixture). For example, certain volatile components present in the mixture may evaporate or undergo chemical transformations, leading to a reduction in the concentration of one or more volatile flavor components. In one embodiment, a concentration of one or more of the at least one volatile flavor components present is greater than a concentration of the same one or more volatile flavor components present in a control pouched product which does not include the one or more organic acids, after the same time period.
- the same mechanisms responsible for loss of whiteness result in a gradual decline in certain volatile components in the flavoring (e.g., aldehydes, ketones, terpenes). Therefore, a decline in the presence of these volatile components leading to the discoloration over time may be expected to diminish the sensory satisfaction associated with products subject to such a degradation process.
- the mixture may further comprise a salt (e.g., alkali metal salts), typically employed in an amount sufficient to provide desired sensory attributes to the mixture.
- a salt e.g., alkali metal salts
- suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, ammonium chloride, flour salt, and the like.
- a representative amount of salt is about 0.5 percent by weight or more, about 1.0 percent by weight or more, or at about 1.5 percent by weight or more, but will typically make up about 10 percent or less of the total weight of the mixture, or about 7.5 percent or less or about 5 percent or less (e.g., about 0.5 to about 5 percent by weight).
- the mixture typically further comprises one or more sweeteners.
- the sweeteners can be any sweetener or combination of sweeteners, in natural or artificial form, or as a combination of natural and artificial sweeteners.
- natural sweeteners include isomaltulose, fructose, sucrose, glucose, maltose, mannose, galactose, lactose, stevia , honey, and the like.
- artificial sweeteners include sucralose, maltodextrin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame K, neotame and the like.
- the sweetener comprises one or more sugar alcohols.
- Sugar alcohols are polyols derived from monosaccharides or disaccharides that have a partially or fully hydrogenated form.
- Sugar alcohols have, for example, about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms and include erythritol, arabitol, ribitol, isomalt, maltitol, dulcitol, iditol, mannitol, xylitol, lactitol, sorbitol, and combinations thereof (e.g., hydrogenated starch hydrolysates).
- a representative amount of sweetener may make up from about 0.1 to about 20 percent or more of the of the mixture by weight, for example, from about 0.1 to about 1%, from about 1 to about 5%, from about 5 to about 10%, or from about 10 to about 20% of the mixture on a weight basis, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- a binder (or combination of binders) may be employed in certain embodiments, in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity to the mixture. Binders also often function as thickening or gelling agents. Typical binders can be organic or inorganic, or a combination thereof. Representative binders include modified cellulose, povidone, sodium alginate, starch-based binders, pectin, carrageenan, pullulan, zein, and the like, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the binder comprises pectin or carrageenan or combinations thereof.
- a binder may be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity to the mixture.
- the amount of binder utilized in the mixture can vary, but is typically up to about 30 weight percent, and certain embodiments are characterized by a binder content of at least about 0.1% by weight, such as about 1 to about 30% by weight, or about 5 to about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- the binder includes a gum, for example, a natural gum.
- a natural gum refers to polysaccharide materials of natural origin that have binding properties, and which are also useful as a thickening or gelling agents.
- Representative natural gums derived from plants, which are typically water soluble to some degree, include xanthan gum, guar gum, gum arabic, ghatti gum, gum tragacanth, karaya gum, locust bean gum, gellan gum, and combinations thereof.
- natural gum binder materials are typically present in an amount of up to about 5% by weight, for example, from about 0.1, about 0.2, about 0.3, about 0.4, about 0.5, about 0.6, about 0.7, about 0.8, about 0.9, or about 1%, to about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- one or more humectants may be employed in the mixture.
- humectants include, but are not limited to, glycerin, propylene glycol, and the like.
- the humectant is typically provided in an amount sufficient to provide desired moisture attributes to the mixture.
- the humectant may impart desirable flow characteristics to the mixture for depositing in a mold.
- a humectant will typically make up about 10% or less of the weight of the mixture (e.g., from about 0.5 to about 8% by weight).
- a representative amount of humectant is about 0.1% to about 1% by weight, about 0.1% to about 0.5% by weight, about 1% to about 5% by weight, about 2% to about 10% by weight, or about 5% to about 10% by weight based on the total weight of the mixture.
- a humectant e.g., glycerol
- the mixture of the present disclosure can comprise pH adjusters or buffering agents.
- pH adjusters and buffering agents include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides (e.g., alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide) and alkaline earth metal hydroxides (e.g., calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide), as well as other alkali metal buffers such as metal carbonates (e.g., potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, or sodium carbonate), or metal bicarbonates such as sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, and the like.
- metal hydroxides e.g., alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide
- alkaline earth metal hydroxides e.g., calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide
- other alkali metal buffers such as metal carbonates (e.g., potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, or sodium carbonate), or metal bicarbonates such as sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, and the like.
- additional, non-limiting examples include ammonia hydroxide, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium benzoate, sodium sesquicarbonate, trisodium phosphate, and combinations thereof.
- the buffering agent is typically present in an amount less than about 5 percent based on the weight of the mixture, for example, from about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, or 0.5% to about 5%, such as, e.g., from about 0.75% to about 4%, from about 0.75% to about 3%, or from about 1% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- suitable buffers include alkali metals acetates, glycinates, phosphates, glycerophosphates, citrates, carbonates, hydrogen carbonates, borates, or mixtures thereof.
- the nicotine complex present in the disclosed compositions requires the inclusion of a base, in certain embodiments, a relatively strong base to release the nicotine therefrom.
- a pH adjuster that is a stronger base than a carbonate is included within the composition.
- bases that may be sufficient for this purpose include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides such as potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, and sodium hydroxide.
- additional buffering agents/pH adjusters may be included in the disclosed compositions (e.g., including, but not limited to, metal carbonates); such additional components can, in some embodiments, serve one or more additional functions within the composition (e.g., modifying the flavor of the composition).
- the pH of compositions within the scope of the present disclosure is about 6-9, e.g., about 6-7, 6-8, 6.5-7, 6.5-8, 6.5-9, 7-8, 7-9, 8-9, or 8.5-9.
- a low pH value e.g., less than about 6.5, less than about 6, less than about 5.5, or less than about 5, including, e.g., about 3 to about 7, about 3 to about 6.5, about 3 to about 6, about 4 to about 6.5, about 4 to about 6 and the like
- low pH values have, in some embodiments, been found to provide improved flavor stability and retention of nicotine over time compared to higher pH oral products.
- pH measurements can be conducted, e.g., by placing 1.5 g of the composition to be tested (which can be, e.g., two pouches) in 30 mL of water. A stir bar magnet is placed inside the container and the mixture is stirred while conducting the pH measurement using a pH meter with glass electrode.
- pouched products comprising a composition comprising nicotine in a resin-bound form, such as nicotine polacrilex
- a resin-bound form such as nicotine polacrilex
- increasing the ionic strength of a composition comprising resin-bound nicotine can improve the release of the nicotine from the resin.
- calcium hydroxide is particularly useful as a base/pH adjuster.
- calcium hydroxide has greater efficiency at displacing nicotine from the resin than, e.g., sodium hydroxide.
- use of calcium hydroxide can, in some embodiments, avoid the use of liquid, caustic sodium hydroxide solution or potassium hydroxide, providing certain benefits with respect to safety and handling.
- a colorant may be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes to the mixture
- Natural or synthetic colorants such as natural or synthetic dyes, food-grade colorants and pharmaceutical-grade colorants may be used.
- colorants include various dyes and pigments, such as caramel coloring and titanium dioxide.
- Natural colorants such as curcumin, beet juice extract, spirulina ; also a variety of synthetic pigments may also be used.
- the colorant is a lake dye, such as a red or blue aluminum lake dye.
- the amount of colorant utilized in the oral composition can vary, but when present is typically up to about 3% by weight, such as from about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%, to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral composition.
- the only active ingredient contained within the disclosed oral products is nicotine (i.e., the referenced nicotine component or the first and second nicotine components).
- the composition as disclosed herein includes one or more active ingredients in addition to such nicotine component(s).
- an “active ingredient” refers to one or more substances belonging to any of the following categories: API (active pharmaceutical ingredient), food additives, natural medicaments, and naturally occurring substances that can have an effect on humans.
- Example active ingredients that can be used in addition to the nicotine component(s) include any ingredient known to impact one or more biological functions within the body, such as ingredients that furnish pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or which affect the structure or any function of the body of humans (e.g., provide a stimulating action on the central nervous system, have an energizing effect, an antipyretic or analgesic action, or an otherwise useful effect on the body).
- the optional additional active ingredient may be of the type generally referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, “phytochemicals” or “functional foods.”
- dietary supplements e.g., nutraceuticals, “phytochemicals” or “functional foods.”
- Non-limiting examples of additional active ingredients include those falling in the categories of botanical ingredients, stimulants, amino acids, and/or pharmaceutical, nutraceutical, and medicinal ingredients (e.g., vitamins, such as A, B3, B6, B12, and C, and/or cannabinoids, such as tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and cannabidiol (CBD)). Each of these categories is further described herein below.
- additional active ingredients where used, will vary depending upon the desired flavor, texture, and desired characteristics of the particular product.
- the additional active ingredient is selected from the group consisting of caffeine, taurine, GABA, theanine, vitamin C, lemon balm extract, ginseng , citicoline, sunflower lecithin, and combinations thereof.
- the active ingredient can include a combination of caffeine, theanine, and optionally ginseng .
- the active ingredient includes a combination of theanine, gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA), and lemon balm extract.
- the active ingredient includes theanine, theanine and tryptophan, or theanine and one or more B vitamins (e.g., vitamin B6 or B12).
- the active ingredient includes a combination of caffeine, taurine, and vitamin C.
- additional active ingredients present will vary depending upon the desired characteristics of the particular product. Typically, such additional active ingredient or combination thereof, where present, is included in a total concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 20%. In some embodiments, the optional additional active ingredient or combination of active ingredients, where present, is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.5% w/w to about 10%, from about 1% to about 10%, from about 1% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the additional active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is included, where present, in a concentration of from about 0.001%, about 0.01%, about 0.1%, or about 1%, up to about 20% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.002%, about 0.003%, about 0.004%, about 0.005%, about 0.006%, about 0.007%, about 0.008%, about 0.009%, about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%,
- the active ingredient comprises a botanical ingredient.
- botanical ingredient refers to any plant material or fungal-derived material, including plant material in its natural form and plant material derived from natural plant materials, such as extracts or isolates from plant materials or treated plant materials (e.g., plant materials subjected to heat treatment, fermentation, bleaching, or other treatment processes capable of altering the physical and/or chemical nature of the material).
- a “botanical” includes, but is not limited to, “herbal materials,” which refer to seed-producing plants that do not develop persistent woody tissue and are often valued for their medicinal or sensory characteristics (e.g., teas or tisanes).
- compositions as disclosed herein can be characterized as free of any tobacco material (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any tobacco material).
- substantially free is meant that no tobacco material has been intentionally added.
- certain embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of tobacco, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of tobacco.
- a botanical When present, a botanical is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the botanical materials useful in the present disclosure may comprise, without limitation, any of the compounds and sources set forth herein, including mixtures thereof. Certain botanical materials of this type are sometimes referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, “phytochemicals” or “functional foods.” Certain botanicals, as the plant material or an extract thereof, have found use in traditional herbal medicine, and are described further herein.
- Non-limiting examples of botanicals or botanical-derived materials include ashwagandha, Bacopa monniera , baobab, basil, Centella asiatica , Chai-hu, chamomile, cherry blossom, chlorophyll, cinnamon, citrus, cloves, cocoa, cordyceps , curcumin, damiana, Dorstenia arifolia, Dorstenia odorata , essential oils, eucalyptus , fennel, Galphimia glauca , ginger, Ginkgo biloba, ginseng (e.g., Panax ginseng ), green tea, Griffonia simplicifolia , guarana, cannabis , hemp, hops, jasmine, Kaempferia parviflora (Thai ginseng ), kava, lavender, lemon balm, lemongrass, licorice, lutein, maca, matcha, Nardostachys chinensis , oil-based extract of Viola odorat
- the active ingredient comprises lemon balm.
- Lemon balm ( Melissa officinalis ) is a mildly lemon-scented herb from the same family as mint (Lamiaceae). The herb is native to Europe, North Africa, and West Asia. The tea of lemon balm, as well as the essential oil and the extract, are used in traditional and alternative medicine.
- the active ingredient comprises lemon balm extract.
- the lemon balm extract is present in an amount of from about 1 to about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the active ingredient comprises ginseng.
- Ginseng is the root of plants of the genus Panax , which are characterized by the presence of unique steroid saponin phytochemicals (ginsenosides) and gintonin. Ginseng finds use as a dietary supplement in energy drinks or herbal teas, and in traditional medicine. Cultivated species include Korean ginseng ( P. ginseng ), South China ginseng ( P. notoginseng ), and American ginseng ( P. quinquefolius ). American ginseng and Korean ginseng vary in the type and quantity of various ginsenosides present.
- the ginseng is American ginseng or Korean ginseng .
- the active ingredient comprises Korean ginseng .
- ginseng is present in an amount of from about 0.4 to about 0.6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the active ingredient comprises one or more stimulants.
- stimulants refers to a material that increases activity of the central nervous system and/or the body, for example, enhancing focus, cognition, vigor, mood, alertness, and the like.
- Non-limiting examples of stimulants include caffeine, theacrine, theobromine, and theophylline.
- Theacrine (1,3,7,9-tetramethyluric acid) is a purine alkaloid which is structurally related to caffeine, and possesses stimulant, analgesic, and anti-inflammatory effects.
- Present stimulants may be natural, naturally derived, or wholly synthetic.
- certain botanical materials may possess a stimulant effect by virtue of the presence of e.g., caffeine or related alkaloids, and accordingly are “natural” stimulants.
- the stimulant e.g., caffeine, theacrine
- caffeine can be obtained by extraction and purification from botanical sources (e.g., tea).
- whole synthetic it is meant that the stimulant has been obtained by chemical synthesis.
- the active ingredient comprises caffeine.
- the caffeine is present in an encapsulated form. On example of an encapsulated caffeine is Vitashure®, available from Balchem Corp., 52 Sunrise Park Road, New Hampton, N.Y., 10958.
- a stimulant or combination of stimulants is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the composition comprises caffeine in an amount of from about 1.5 to about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition;
- the active ingredient comprises an amino acid.
- amino acid refers to an organic compound that contains amine (—NH 2 ) and carboxyl (—COOH) or sulfonic acid (SO 3 H) functional groups, along with a side chain (R group), which is specific to each amino acid.
- Amino acids may be proteinogenic or non-proteinogenic. By “proteinogenic” is meant that the amino acid is one of the twenty naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins.
- the proteinogenic amino acids include alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine.
- non-proteinogenic is meant that either the amino acid is not found naturally in protein, or is not directly produced by cellular machinery (e.g., is the product of post-translational modification).
- Non-limiting examples of non-proteinogenic amino acids include gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), taurine (2-aminoethanesulfonic acid), theanine (L- ⁇ -glutamylethylamide), hydroxyproline, and beta-alanine.
- the active ingredient comprises theanine.
- the active ingredient comprises GABA.
- the active ingredient comprises a combination of theanine and GABA.
- the active ingredient is a combination of theanine, GABA, and lemon balm.
- the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine, theanine, and ginseng .
- the active ingredient comprises taurine.
- the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine and taurine.
- an amino acid or combination of amino acids is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the active ingredient comprises a vitamin or combination of vitamins.
- vitamin refers to an organic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of metabolism in a mammal.
- vitamins required by human metabolism which are: vitamin A (as all-trans-retinol, all-trans-retinyl-esters, as well as all-trans-beta-carotene and other provitamin A carotenoids), vitamin B1 (thiamine), vitamin B2 (riboflavin), vitamin B3 (niacin), vitamin B5 (pantothenic acid), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B7 (biotin), vitamin B9 (folic acid or folate), vitamin B12 (cobalamins), vitamin C (ascorbic acid), vitamin D (calciferols), vitamin E (tocopherols and tocotrienols), and vitamin K (quinones).
- the active ingredient comprises vitamin C.
- the active ingredient comprises vitamin C.
- a vitamin or combination of vitamins is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 6% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, or about 0.1% w/w, to about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, or about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- vitamins e.g., vitamin B6, vitamin B12, vitamin E, vitamin C, or a combination thereof
- concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 6% by weight such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%,
- the active ingredient comprises one or more antioxidants.
- antioxidant refers to a substance which prevents or suppresses oxidation by terminating free radical reactions and may delay or prevent some types of cellular damage. Antioxidants may be naturally occurring or synthetic. Naturally occurring antioxidants include those found in foods and botanical materials. Non-limiting examples of antioxidants include certain botanical materials, vitamins, polyphenols, and phenol derivatives.
- Examples of botanical materials which are associated with antioxidant characteristics include without limitation acai berry, alfalfa, allspice, annatto seed, apricot oil, basil, bee balm, wild bergamot, black pepper, blueberries, borage seed oil, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, chaga mushroom, chervil, cinnamon, dark chocolate, potato peel, grape seed, ginseng , gingko biloba , Saint John's Wort, saw palmetto, green tea, black tea, black cohosh, cayenne, chamomile, cloves, cocoa powder, cranberry, dandelion, grapefruit, honeybush, echinacea , garlic, evening primrose, feverfew, ginger, goldenseal, hawthorn, hibiscus flower, jiaogulan, kava, lavender, licorice, marjoram, milk thistle, mints (menthe),
- Such botanical materials may be provided in fresh or dry form, essential oils, or may be in the form of an extracts.
- the botanical materials (as well as their extracts) often include compounds from various classes known to provide antioxidant effects, such as minerals, vitamins, isoflavones, phytoesterols, allyl sulfides, dithiolthiones, isothiocyanates, indoles, lignans, flavonoids, polyphenols, and carotenoids.
- Examples of compounds found in botanical extracts or oils include ascorbic acid, peanut endocarb, resveratrol, sulforaphane, beta-carotene, lycopene, lutein, co-enzyme Q, carnitine, quercetin, kaempferol, and the like. See, e.g., Santhosh et al., Phytomedicine, 12(2005) 216-220, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Non-limiting examples of other suitable antioxidants include citric acid, Vitamin E or a derivative thereof, a tocopherol, epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate, erythorbic acid, sodium erythorbate, 4-hexylresorcinol, theaflavin, theaflavin monogallate A or B, theaflavin digallate, phenolic acids, glycosides, quercitrin, isoquercitrin, hyperoside, polyphenols, catechols, resveratrols, oleuropein, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), tertiary butylhydroquinone (TBHQ), and combinations thereof.
- a tocopherol epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate
- erythorbic acid sodium erythorbate
- 4-hexylresorcinol theaf
- an antioxidant is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.005%, about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the active ingredient comprises one or more cannabinoids.
- cannabinoid refers to a class of diverse chemical compounds that acts on cannabinoid receptors, also known as the endocannabinoid system, in cells that alter neurotransmitter release in the brain. Ligands for these receptor proteins include the endocannabinoids produced naturally in the body by animals; phytocannabinoids, found in cannabis ; and synthetic cannabinoids, manufactured artificially.
- Cannabinoids found in cannabis include, without limitation: cannabigerol (CBG), cannabichromene (CBC), cannabidiol (CBD), tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), cannabinol (CBN), cannabinodiol (CBDL), cannabicyclol (CBL), cannabivarin (CBV), tetrahydrocannabivarin (THCV), cannabidivarin (CBDV), cannabichromevarin (CBCV), cannabigerovarin (CBGV), cannabigerol monomethyl ether (CBGM), cannabinerolic acid, cannabidiolic acid (CBDA), cannabinol propyl variant (CBNV), cannabitriol (CBO), tetrahydrocannabinolic acid (THCA), and tetrahydrocannabivarinic acid (THCV A).
- CBD cannabigerol
- the cannabinoid is selected from tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the primary psychoactive compound in cannabis , and cannabidiol (CBD) another major constituent of the plant, but which is devoid of psychoactivity. All of the above compounds can be used in the form of an isolate from plant material or synthetically derived.
- the active ingredient can be a cannabimimetic, which is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids.
- cannabimimetic is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids. Examples include yangonin, alpha-amyrin or beta-amyrin (also classified as terpenes), cyanidin, curcumin (tumeric), catechin, quercetin, salvinorin A, N-acylethanolamines, and N-alkylamide lipids.
- a cannabinoid e.g., CBD
- cannabimimetic is typically in a concentration of at least about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.1% to about 30%, such as, e.g., from about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, or about 30% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- CBD cannabinoid
- cannabimimetic is typically in a concentration of at least about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.1% to about 30%, such as, e.g., from about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.
- Active ingredients suitable for use in the present disclosure can also be classified as terpenes, many of which are associated with biological effects, such as calming effects.
- Terpenes are understood to have the general formula of (C 5 H 8 ) n and include monoterpenes, sesquiterpenes, and diterpenes.
- Terpenes can be acyclic, monocyclic or bicyclic in structure. Some terpenes provide an entourage effect when used in combination with cannabinoids or cannabimimetics.
- Examples include beta-caryophyllene, linalool, limonene, beta-citronellol, linalyl acetate, pinene (alpha or beta), geraniol, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, and germacrene, which may be used singly or in combination.
- the active ingredient comprises an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API).
- API can be any known agent adapted for therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic use. These can include, for example, synthetic organic compounds, proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcholine, dopamine, melatonin), and nucleic acid sequences, having therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic activity.
- synthetic organic compounds proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcho
- Non-limiting examples of APIs include analgesics and antipyretics (e.g., acetylsalicylic acid, acetaminophen, 3-(4-isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid), phosphatidylserine, myoinositol, docosahexaenoic acid (DHA, Omega-3), arachidonic acid (AA, Omega-6), S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), beta-hydroxy-beta-methylbutyrate (HMB), citicoline (cytidine-5′-diphosphate-choline), and cotinine.
- the active ingredient comprises citicoline.
- the active ingredient is a combination of citicoline, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng .
- the active ingredient comprises sunflower lecithin.
- the active ingredient is a combination of sunflower lecithin, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng.
- an API when present, is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, or about 1%, to about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- the composition is substantially free of any API.
- substantially free of any API means that the composition does not contain, and specifically excludes, the presence of any API as defined herein, such as any Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved therapeutic agent intended to treat any medical condition.
- FDA Food and Drug Administration
- the mixture may include a tobacco material.
- the tobacco material can vary in species, type, and form. Generally, the tobacco material is obtained from for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species.
- Example Nicotiana species include N. tabacum, N. rustica, N. alata, N. arentsii, N. excelsior, N. forgetiana, N. glauca, N. glutinosa, N. gossei, N. kawakamii, N. knightiana, N. langsdorffi, N. otophora, N. setchelli, N. sylvestris, N. tomentosa, N. tomentosiformis, N. undulata, N.
- Nicotiana species from which suitable tobacco materials can be obtained can be derived using genetic-modification or crossbreeding techniques (e.g., tobacco plants can be genetically engineered or crossbred to increase or decrease production of components, characteristics or attributes). See, for example, the types of genetic modifications of plants set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,093 to Fitzmaurice et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,668,295 to Wahab et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,624 to Fitzmaurice et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,844,119 to Weigl; U.S. Pat. No.
- the Nicotiana species can, in some embodiments, be selected for the content of various compounds that are present therein. For example, plants can be selected on the basis that those plants produce relatively high quantities of one or more of the compounds desired to be isolated therefrom.
- plants of the Nicotiana species e.g., Galpao commun tobacco
- the plant of the Nicotiana species can be included within a mixture as disclosed herein.
- virtually all of the plant e.g., the whole plant
- various parts or pieces of the plant can be harvested or separated for further use after harvest.
- the flower, leaves, stem, stalk, roots, seeds, and various combinations thereof, can be isolated for further use or treatment.
- the tobacco material comprises tobacco leaf (lamina).
- the mixture disclosed herein can include processed tobacco parts or pieces, cured and aged tobacco in essentially natural lamina and/or stem form, a tobacco extract, extracted tobacco pulp (e.g., using water as a solvent), or a mixture of the foregoing (e.g., a mixture that combines extracted tobacco pulp with granulated cured and aged natural tobacco lamina).
- the tobacco material comprises solid tobacco material selected from the group consisting of lamina and stems.
- the tobacco that is used for the mixture most preferably includes tobacco lamina, or a tobacco lamina and stem mixture (of which at least a portion is smoke-treated).
- Portions of the tobaccos within the mixture may have processed forms, such as processed tobacco stems (e.g., cut-rolled stems, cut-rolled-expanded stems or cut-puffed stems), or volume expanded tobacco (e.g., puffed tobacco, such as dry ice expanded tobacco (DIET)).
- DIET dry ice expanded tobacco
- the d mixture optionally may incorporate tobacco that has been fermented. See, also, the types of tobacco processing techniques set forth in PCT WO2005/063060 to Atchley et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the tobacco material is typically used in a form that can be described as particulate (i.e., shredded, ground, granulated, or powder form).
- the manner by which the tobacco material is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary.
- plant parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a particulate form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like.
- the plant material is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like.
- tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent or less than about 5 weight percent.
- the tobacco material is employed in the form of parts or pieces that have an average particle size between 1.4 millimeters and 250 microns.
- the tobacco particles may be sized to pass through a screen mesh to obtain the particle size range required.
- air classification equipment may be used to ensure that small sized tobacco particles of the desired sizes, or range of sizes, may be collected.
- differently sized pieces of granulated tobacco may be mixed together.
- tobacco parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a powder type of form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like.
- the tobacco is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like.
- tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent to less than about 5 weight percent.
- the tobacco plant or portion thereof can be separated into individual parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be removed from the stems, and/or the stems and leaves can be removed from the stalk).
- the harvested plant or individual parts or pieces can be further subdivided into parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be shredded, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled or ground into pieces or parts that can be characterized as filler-type pieces, granules, particulates or fine powders).
- the plant, or parts thereof can be subjected to external forces or pressure (e.g., by being pressed or subjected to roll treatment).
- the plant or portion thereof can have a moisture content that approximates its natural moisture content (e.g., its moisture content immediately upon harvest), a moisture content achieved by adding moisture to the plant or portion thereof, or a moisture content that results from the drying of the plant or portion thereof.
- powdered, pulverized, ground or milled pieces of plants or portions thereof can have moisture contents of less than about 25 weight percent, often less than about 20 weight percent, and frequently less than about 15 weight percent.
- a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species For the preparation of oral products, it is typical for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species to be subjected to a curing process.
- the tobacco materials incorporated within the mixture for inclusion within products as disclosed herein are those that have been appropriately cured and/or aged. Descriptions of various types of curing processes for various types of tobaccos are set forth in Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology , Davis et al. (Eds.) (1999). Examples of techniques and conditions for curing flue-cured tobacco are set forth in Nestor et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 20, 467-475 (2003) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,895,974 to Peele, which are incorporated herein by reference.
- tobacco materials that can be employed include flue-cured or Virginia (e.g., K326), burley, sun-cured (e.g., Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos, including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos), Maryland, dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passanda, Cubano, Jatin and Bezuki tobaccos), light air cured (e.g., North Wisconsin and Galpao tobaccos), Indian air cured, Red Russian and Rustica tobaccos, as well as various other rare or specialty tobaccos and various blends of any of the foregoing tobaccos.
- flue-cured or Virginia e.g., K326)
- burley sun-cured
- Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos
- Maryland dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passand
- the tobacco material may also have a so-called “blended” form.
- the tobacco material may include a mixture of parts or pieces of flue-cured, burley (e.g., Malawi burley tobacco) and Oriental tobaccos (e.g., as tobacco composed of, or derived from, tobacco lamina, or a mixture of tobacco lamina and tobacco stem).
- a representative blend may incorporate about 30 to about 70 parts burley tobacco (e.g., lamina, or lamina and stem), and about 30 to about 70 parts flue cured tobacco (e.g., stem, lamina, or lamina and stem) on a dry weight basis.
- example tobacco blends incorporate about 75 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 15 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 25 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 10 parts burley tobacco, and about 25 parts Oriental tobacco; on a dry weight basis.
- Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 20 to about 30 parts Oriental tobacco and about 70 to about 80 parts flue-cured tobacco on a dry weight basis.
- Tobacco materials used in the present disclosure can be subjected to, for example, fermentation, bleaching, and the like.
- the tobacco materials can be, for example, irradiated, pasteurized, or otherwise subjected to controlled heat treatment.
- controlled heat treatment processes are detailed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 8,061,362 to Mua et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- tobacco materials can be treated with water and an additive capable of inhibiting reaction of asparagine to form acrylamide upon heating of the tobacco material (e.g., an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di- and trivalent cations, asparaginase, certain non-reducing saccharides, certain reducing agents, phenolic compounds, certain compounds having at least one free thiol group or functionality, oxidizing agents, oxidation catalysts, natural plant extracts (e.g., rosemary extract), and combinations thereof.
- an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di
- the type of tobacco material is selected such that it is initially visually lighter in color than other tobacco materials to some degree (e.g., whitened or bleached).
- Tobacco pulp can be whitened in certain embodiments according to any means known in the art.
- bleached tobacco material produced by various whitening methods using various bleaching or oxidizing agents and oxidation catalysts can be used.
- Example oxidizing agents include peroxides (e.g., hydrogen peroxide), chlorite salts, chlorate salts, perchlorate salts, hypochlorite salts, ozone, ammonia, potassium permanganate, and combinations thereof.
- Example oxidation catalysts are titanium dioxide, manganese dioxide, and combinations thereof.
- the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness of at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or at least about 80%. In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness in the range of about 50% to about 90%, about 55% to about 75%, or about 60% to about 70%. ISO brightness can be measured according to ISO 3688:1999 or ISO 2470-1:2016.
- the whitened tobacco material can be characterized as lightened in color (e.g., “whitened”) in comparison to an untreated tobacco material.
- White colors are often defined with reference to the International Commission on Illumination's (CIE's) chromaticity diagram.
- CIE's International Commission on Illumination's
- the whitened tobacco material can, in certain embodiments, be characterized as closer on the chromaticity diagram to pure white than an untreated tobacco material.
- Typical inclusion ranges for tobacco materials can vary depending on the nature and type of the tobacco material, and the intended effect on the final mixture, with an example range of up to about 30% by weight (or up to about 20% by weight or up to about 10% by weight or up to about 5% by weight), based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 15% by weight).
- a tobacco material e.g., a whitened tobacco material
- is included in a relatively small amount e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.1% by weight).
- the products of the disclosure can be characterized as completely free or substantially free of tobacco material (other than purified nicotine as an active ingredient).
- tobacco material other than purified nicotine as an active ingredient.
- certain embodiments can be characterized as having less than 1% by weight, or less than 0.5% by weight, or less than 0.1% by weight of tobacco material, or 0% by weight of tobacco material.
- additives can be included in the disclosed mixture.
- the mixture can be processed, blended, formulated, combined and/or mixed with other materials or ingredients.
- the additives can be artificial, or can be obtained or derived from herbal or biological sources.
- further types of additives include thickening or gelling agents (e.g., fish gelatin), emulsifiers, oral care additives (e.g., thyme oil, eucalyptus oil, and zinc), preservatives (e.g., potassium sorbate and the like), zinc or magnesium salts selected to be relatively water soluble for compositions with greater water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc gluconate) or selected to be relatively water insoluble for compositions with reduced water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc oxide), disintegration aids, or combinations thereof.
- thickening or gelling agents e.g., fish gelatin
- emulsifiers e.g., thyme oil, eucalyptus oil,
- Typical inclusion ranges for such additional additives can vary depending on the nature and function of the additive and the intended effect on the final mixture, with an example range of up to about 10% by weight, based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 5% by weight).
- additives can be employed together (e.g., as additive formulations) or separately (e.g., individual additive components can be added at different stages involved in the preparation of the final mixture).
- aforementioned types of additives may be encapsulated as provided in the final product or mixture.
- Example encapsulated additives are described, for example, in WO2010/132444 to Atchley, which has been previously incorporated by reference herein.
- the disclosed compositions can comprise (in addition to the nicotine component(s) described), a filler component (e.g., MCC), a base (e.g., NaOH), a sweetener (e.g., xylitol, sucralose, and/or acesulfame K, or the like), a salt, and a flavorant.
- a filler component e.g., MCC
- a base e.g., NaOH
- a sweetener e.g., xylitol, sucralose, and/or acesulfame K, or the like
- a salt e.g., a salt, and a flavorant.
- the composition comprises: 0% to about 1.5% of free base nicotine; about 2% to about 8% by weight of a nicotine polymer complex (e.g., comprising 20% nicotine); about 3% to about 6% by weight of a base; about 2% to about 8% by weight of a salt, 30% to about 50% by weight of a filler, about 1% to about 5% by weight of a sweetener, and about 0.5% to about 2.5% by weight of a flavorant, all based on the total weight of the composition within the pouched product, including the additional water sprayed onto the pouched product after pouching, as described further herein below.
- a nicotine polymer complex e.g., comprising 20% nicotine
- 3% to about 6% by weight of a base e.g., comprising 20% nicotine
- a salt e.g., comprising 20% nicotine
- 30% to about 50% by weight of a filler about 1% to about 5% by weight of a sweetener
- about 0.5% to about 2.5% by weight of a flavorant
- the products of the disclosure can have widely varying nicotine release rates.
- the pH of the composition may, in some embodiments, affect the rate of release of nicotine from the nicotine-polymer complex. Dissolution and counterions confirms that pH impacts the extraction of nicotine from the resin. For example, reducing the pH of the composition may slow the release of nicotine therefrom.
- the inclusion of certain alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salts can enhance release of nicotine from the resin, even at low pH values.
- the inclusion of two nicotine components in some embodiments can provide for two different rates of release of nicotine from a given product within the oral cavity.
- the first nicotine component (which may provide for somewhat immediate or fast release) may be released more quickly than the second nicotine component (which may provide for more extended release of nicotine).
- the nicotine is released from the disclosed compositions/products within the user's oral cavity over a period of at least about 30 minutes, at least about 40 minutes, at least about 45 minutes, at least about 50 minutes, at least about 55 minutes, or at least about 60 minutes, e.g., about 30 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 30 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 80 minutes, or about 50 minutes to about 70 minutes. In some embodiments, about 80% of the nicotine is released from the pouched product after 90 minutes of use.
- the moisture content of the products provided herein can vary.
- the moisture content of the disclosed pouched products is above about 5% by weight, e.g., about 5% to about 50%.
- the moisture content of the disclosed pouched products is about 48% or below (e.g., including about 5% to about 48%).
- the products have a moisture content that is above about 15% by weight, above about 20% by weight, above about 25% by weight, above about 30% by weight, or above about 40% by weight, based on the entirety of the pouched product.
- total moisture content includes about 5% to about 50%, about 5 to about 48%, about 10% to about 50%, about 10% to about 48%, about 15% to about 50%, about 15% to about 48%, about 25% to about 35%, about 25% to about 50%, about 25% to about 48%, about 30% to about 50%, about 30% to about 48%, about 30% to about 35%, about 40% to about 50%, about 40% to about 48%, about 45% to about 50%, or about 45% to about 48% by weight.
- Such total moisture content includes, e.g., water in the composition within the pouched composition and additional water added to the product, e.g., sprayed onto the outside of the product after pouching.
- any one or more of a filler component, a tobacco material, and the overall oral product described herein can be described as a particulate material.
- the term “particulate” refers to a material in the form of a plurality of individual particles, some of which can be in the form of an agglomerate of multiple particles, wherein the particles have an average length to width ratio less than 2:1, such as less than 1.5:1, such as about 1:1.
- the particles of a particulate material can be described as substantially spherical or granular.
- the various components of the mixture may vary. As such, the overall mixture of various components with e.g., powdered mixture components may be relatively uniform in nature.
- the components noted above, which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components of the mixture, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients.
- the nicotine component/first nicotine component may not be water soluble; as such, in some such embodiments, the order of mixing may be important.
- a composition is provided as follows. Dry ingredients, including the filler and the first nicotine component (i.e., the nicotine-polymer complex) are combined to give a dry phase. Wet ingredients, including the second nicotine component (e.g., in aqueous solution form) and flavorant are separately combined to give a liquid phase. Additional ingredients, such as sweeteners are added to the liquid phase. The dry phase and liquid phase are mixed; a base is added to the mixture, e.g., while blending. Additional water is generally added to the pouches during pouching, as referenced herein below, to achieve the desired moisture content.
- the various components of the mixture to be pouched may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art.
- Any mixing method that brings the mixture ingredients into intimate contact can be used, such as a mixing apparatus featuring an impeller or other structure capable of agitation.
- mixing equipment include casing drums, conditioning cylinders or drums, liquid spray apparatus, conical-type blenders, ribbon blenders, mixers available as FKM130, FKM600, FKM1200, FKM2000 and FKM3000 from Littleford Day, Inc., Plough Share types of mixer cylinders, Hobart mixers, and the like. See also, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al.; U.S. Pat.
- the components forming the mixture are prepared such that the mixture thereof may be used in a starch molding process for forming the mixture. Manners and methods for formulating mixtures will be apparent to those skilled in the art. See, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 6,510,855 to Korte et al.; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,834,654 to Williams, U.S. Pat. No. 4,725,440 to Ridgway et al., and 6,077,524 to Bolder et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- a moisture-permeable packet or pouch can act as a container for use of the composition within.
- the pouch provides a liquid-permeable container of a type that may be considered to be similar in character to the mesh-like type of material that is used for the construction of a tea bag.
- flavoring ingredients, disintegration aids, and other desired components may be incorporated within, or applied to, the pouch material.
- the composition/construction of such packets or pouches, such as the container pouch 20 in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 1 may be varied as noted herein.
- suitable packets, pouches or containers of the type used for the manufacture of smokeless tobacco products are available under the tradenames CatchDry, Ettan, General, Granit, Goteborgs Rape, Grovsnus White, Metropol Kaktus, Mocca Anis, Mocca Mint, Mocca Wintergreen, Kicks, Probe, Prince, Skruf and TreAnkrare.
- a pouch type of product similar in shape and form to various embodiments of a pouched product described herein is commercially available as ZONNIC (distributed by Niconovum AB).
- pouch type products generally similar in shape and form to various embodiments of a pouched product are set forth as snuff bag compositions E-J in Example 1 of PCT WO 2007/104573 to Axelsson et al., which is incorporated herein by reference, which are produced using excipient ingredients and processing conditions that can be used to manufacture pouched products as described herein.
- the pouches can be formed from a fleece material, e.g., fibrous nonwoven webs.
- the term “fiber” is defined as a basic element of textiles. Fibers are often in the form of a rope- or string-like element.
- the term “fiber” is intended to include fibers, filaments, continuous filaments, staple fibers, and the like.
- the term “multicomponent fibers” refers to fibers that comprise two or more components that are different by physical or chemical nature, including bicomponent fibers. Specifically, the term “multicomponent fibers” includes staple and continuous fibers prepared from two or more polymers present in discrete structured domains in the fiber, as opposed to blends where the domains tend to be dispersed, random or unstructured.
- a “fleece material” as used herein may be formed from various types of fibers (e.g., cellulosic fibers; such as viscose fibers, regenerated cellulose fibers, cellulose fibers, and wood pulps; cotton fibers; other natural fibers; or polymer/synthetic-type fibers) capable of being formed into a traditional fleece fabrics or other traditional pouch materials.
- fibers e.g., cellulosic fibers; such as viscose fibers, regenerated cellulose fibers, cellulose fibers, and wood pulps; cotton fibers; other natural fibers; or polymer/synthetic-type fibers
- fleece materials may be provided in the form of a woven or nonwoven fabric. Suitable types of fleece materials, for example, are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,931,493 to Sebastian et al.; US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0000140 to Sebastian et al.; and US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/00736
- nonwoven is used herein in reference to fibrous materials, webs, mats, batts, or sheets in which fibers are aligned in an undefined or random orientation.
- the nonwoven fibers are initially presented as unbound fibers or filaments.
- An important step in the manufacturing of nonwovens involves binding the various fibers or filaments together.
- the manner in which the fibers or filaments are bound can vary, and include thermal, mechanical and chemical techniques that are selected in part based on the desired characteristics of the final product, as discussed in more detail below.
- the pouch material can be dissolvable (i.e., orally ingestible) such that under conditions of normal use (i.e., upon contact with saliva in the mouth of a user), the pouch material dissolves.
- the pouch material will dissolve after a significant amount of the soluble components of the composition within the pouch (e.g., active ingredient(s) and/or flavorant(s)) permeate through the pouch material into the mouth of the user.
- the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate such that the pouch material holds the composition together for a period of time sufficient to allow for the release of substantially all water soluble components.
- the composition within the pouch material can also be dissolvable.
- the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate similar to the rate at which the composition dissolves.
- the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in about 5 minutes or longer, about 15 minutes or longer, about 30 minutes or longer, or about an hour or longer.
- the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in no less than 30 minutes, no less than 45 minutes, or no less than an hour.
- the pouch material may be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in a time of about 30 seconds to about 30 minutes, about 1 minute to about 25 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes.
- a pouched product comprising a dissolvable pouch material can provide environmental advantages.
- dissolvable pouch materials can include, but are not limited to, spun or nonwoven alginate fibers, gluten fibers, mini-perforated flat sheets derived from alginate, carrageenan, and other polymer binders, and combinations thereof.
- the dissolution rate of the pouch material can be controlled by the use of cross-linking technology between alginate or pectin and calcium salts, for example.
- the dissolvable pouch material can include fast dissolving fibers formed using an electrospinning process (e.g., solution-based electrospinning) with hydrophilic polymers.
- the fibers within the fleece material may include, but are not limited to, a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polyhydroxyalkanoates, polycaprolactone, polybutylene succinate, polybutylene succinate adipate, and copolymers thereof.
- the fibers within the fleece material may be selected from the groups consisting wool, cotton, fibers made of cellulosic material, such as regenerated cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose nitrate, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl hydroxypropyl cellulose, protein fibers, and the like. See also, the fiber types set forth in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0083438 to Sebastian et al., which is incorporated by reference herein.
- the pouch material can include a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, and combinations thereof.
- Regenerated cellulose fibers can be particularly advantageous, and are typically prepared by extracting non-cellulosic compounds from wood, contacting the extracted wood with caustic soda, followed by carbon disulfide and then by sodium hydroxide, giving a viscous solution. The solution is subsequently forced through spinneret heads to create viscous threads of regenerated fibers.
- Example methods for the preparation of regenerated cellulose are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,274 to Leoni et al; U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,666 to Baldini et al; U.S. Pat. No. 4,252,766 to Baldini et al.; U.S.
- the fibers used in the nonwoven web according to the present disclosure can vary, and include fibers having any type of cross-section, including, but not limited to, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, and multilobal.
- the fibers can have one or more void spaces, wherein the void spaces can have, for example, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, or multilobal cross-sections.
- the fibers can be selected from single-component (i.e., uniform in composition throughout the fiber) or multicomponent fiber types including, but not limited to, fibers having a sheath/core structure and fibers having an islands-in-the-sea structure, as well as fibers having a side-by-side, segmented pie, segmented cross, segmented ribbon, or tipped multilobal cross-sections.
- the physical parameters of the fibers present in the nonwoven web can vary.
- the fibers used in the nonwoven web can have varying size (e.g., length, dpf) and crimp characteristics.
- fibers used in the nonwoven web can be nano fibers, sub-micron fibers, and/or micron-sized fibers.
- fibers of the nonwoven webs useful herein can measure about 1.5 dpf to about 2.0 dpf, or about 1.6 dpf to about 1.90 dpf.
- each fiber can be a staple fiber.
- Each fiber length can measure about 35 mm to about 60 mm, or about 38 mm to about 55 mm, for example.
- each fiber can measure about 4-10 crimps per cm, or about 5-8 crimps per cm. It can be advantageous for all fibers in the nonwoven web to have similar fiber size and crimp attributes to ensure favorable blending and orientation of the fibers in the nonwoven web.
- the fibrous webs can have varying thicknesses, porosities and other parameters.
- the nonwoven web can be formed such that the fiber orientation and porosity of the pouched product formed therefrom can retain the composition adapted for oral use that is enclosed within the outer water-permeable pouch, but can also allow the flavors of the composition to be enjoyed by the consumer.
- the fibrous webs can have a basis weight of about 20 gsm to about 60 gsm, about 20 gsm to about 35 gsm, or about 25 gsm to about 30 gsm. In a preferred embodiment, the fibrous web can have a basis weight of about 28 gsm.
- Basis weight of a fabric can be measured using ASTM D3776/D3776M-09a (2013) (Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric), for example.
- the fibrous web can have a thickness of about 0.1 mm to about 0.15 mm (e.g., about 0.11 mm).
- the fibrous web can have an elongation of about 70% to about 80%, e.g., about 78%.
- the fibrous web can have a peak load of about 4 lbs. to about 8 lbs., e.g., about 5.5 lbs.
- Elongation and breaking strength of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D5034-09(2013) (Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)), for example.
- the fibrous web can have a Tensile Energy Absorption (TEA) of about 35 to about 40, e.g., about 37.
- the fibrous web can have a porosity of greater than about 10,000 ml/min/cm 2 .
- TEA can be measured, for example, as the work done to break the specimen under tensile loading per lateral area of the specimen.
- Porosity, or air permeability of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D737-04(2012) (Standard Test method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics), for example.
- the outer water-permeable pouch is made from a nonwoven web as described above.
- a pouch is constructed of a single layer of the nonwoven web.
- the pouch material comprises a multilayer composite made up of two or more nonwoven layers, each layer being orally ingestible. Each nonwoven layer can be formed by processes discussed below.
- a first layer can be relatively hydrophilic and a second layer can be relatively hydrophobic (compared to each other).
- an outer water-permeable pouch can comprise an outer hydrophilic layer and an inner hydrophobic layer that can be in contact with the composition adapted for oral use.
- the hydrophobic layer can, during storage of the pouched product, retain any moisture in the composition adapted for oral use such that flavors in the composition are not lost due to moisture loss.
- capillaries in the hydrophobic layer can wick out moisture into the mouth of the user, such that flavors are released into the oral cavity when used.
- the pouch material can enhance storage stability without significantly compromising the enjoyment of the product by the end user.
- the relatively hydrophilic layer could be located on the interior of the multi-layer structure.
- the two layers can be formed into a multi-layer composite nonwoven material using any means known in the art, such as by attaching the two layers together using adhesive or stitching.
- the hydrophobicity of a textile material can be evaluated, for example, by measuring the contact angles between a drop of liquid and the surface of a textile material, as is known in the art.
- the pouch material can comprise a flavor component (such as any of the flavor components noted herein), which can be applied to the nonwoven layer in any conventional manner such as by coating, printing, and the like.
- a flavor component such as any of the flavor components noted herein
- the flavor within an outer pouch material can differ from a flavor contained within the internal composition adapted for oral use.
- the pouch material can have a first flavor component and after the pouch material has dissolved, more moisture can reach the composition within the pouch material and a flavor component within the composition can be enhanced.
- the product can be designed to provide multiple, different sensory experiences, a first sensory experience where the flavor in the outer pouch material transitions into the mouth of the user and a second sensory experience, typically occurring later in time, where the flavor of the internal composition transitions into the mouth of the user.
- a heat sealable binder coating or a binder material may be added to the fibers prior to, during, or after forming the fleece material.
- heat sealable binder coatings refers to coating materials, such as acrylic polymer compositions, applied to a substrate (e.g., a nonwoven web or fleece material) and which are capable of sealing seams of individual pouches upon heating.
- a binder material can be added to the web fibers before or during the laying of the fibrous web (i.e., before the fibrous web is bonded to form a fleece material).
- a binder material can be added to the fleece material after it has been formed.
- the binder material is in the form of a liquid coating.
- a binding powder can be applied to the fleece material.
- powdered polyethylene can be used as a binder material.
- the liquid or powder coating can be applied, for example, between layers of fibers when cross-laying, air laying, or as an after treatment. A short exposure in an oven is sufficient to melt and fuse the binder material.
- the means of producing the nonwoven web can vary.
- Web formation can be accomplished by any means known in the art.
- Web formation will typically involve a carding step, which involves deposition of the fibers onto a surface followed by aligning/blending the fibers in a machine direction. Thereafter, the fibrous web is typically subjected to some type of bonding/entanglement including, but not limited to, thermal fusion or bonding, mechanical entanglement, chemical adhesive, or a combination thereof.
- the fibrous web is bonded thermally using a calendar (which can provide flat or point bonding), steam jet bonding, or a thru-air oven. Additional bonding methods include ultrasonic bonding and crimping.
- needle punching is utilized, wherein needles are used to provide physical entanglement between fibers.
- the web is entangled using hydroentanglement, which is a process used to entangle and bond fibers using hydrodynamic forces.
- a binder material can be applied to the fibers of the fibrous web before laying the fibrous web, during formation of the fibrous web, and/or after the fibrous web has been bonded to form a fleece material. After forming the fleece material, heat can be applied to the fleece material in order to activate/at least partially melt the binder material to further bond the fleece material and thereby further enhance the mechanical integrity of the fleece material.
- Methods for forming a nonwoven web comprising natural and synthetic fibers may include drylaid, airlaid and wetlaid methods.
- the nonwoven fabric can be formed using a spunlaid or spunmelt process, which includes both spunbond and meltblown processes, wherein such processes are understood to typically entail melting, extruding, collecting and bonding thermoplastic polymer materials to form a fibrous nonwoven web.
- the technique of meltblowing is known in the art and is discussed in various patents, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 3,849,241 to Butin, U.S. Pat. No. 3,987,185 to Buntin et al., U.S. Pat. No.
- the nonwoven web is made by providing a dry laid or a spun laid web of fibers, and then needle punching the web to bond the dry laid or spun laid web.
- the needle punched fleece material is produced when barbed needles are pushed through the fibrous web, forcing some fibers upwards or downwards through the web by the barbed needles.
- the fibers punched through the web remain at their new position once the needles are withdrawn. This needling action interlocks fibers and holds the structure together by inter fiber friction forces caused by compression of the web, thereby bonding the web.
- the web is converted into a nonwoven fabric.
- the nonwoven web is made by a fleece carding process with point bonding.
- the point bonding (e.g., using a calendar) should be limited to a relatively small portion of the surface area of the nonwoven web to maintain good porosity in the web for migration of water-soluble components through the web during oral use.
- the point bonding is limited to less than about 60% of the surface area of the nonwoven web (or resulting pouch), such as less than about 50%, less than about 30%, or less than about 20% (e.g., about 1% to about 50%, about 5% to about 40%, or about 10% to about 30%).
- An advantage of point bonding is the ability to control the porosity, flexibility and fabric strength.
- the nonwoven web can be subjected to hydroentangling.
- hydroentangled or “spunlaced” as applied to a nonwoven fabric herein defines a web subjected to impingement by a curtain of high speed, fine water jets, typically emanating from a nozzle jet strip accommodated in a pressure vessel often referred to as a manifold or an injector.
- This hydroentangled fabric can be characterized by reoriented, twisted, turned and entangled fibers.
- the fibers can be hydroentangled by exposing the nonwoven web to water pressure from one or more hydroentangling manifolds at a water pressure in the range of about 10 bar to about 1000 bar.
- spunlace technology in certain embodiments, will have less impact on porosity of the web and, thus, may enhance flavor transfer through the nonwoven pouch material.
- the nonwoven web can be subjected to a second bonding method in order to reduce elongation of the web during processing.
- nonwoven webs of the present disclosure can exhibit significant elongation during high speed processing on pouching equipment. Too much elongation of the nonwoven web can cause the web to shrink during processing, such that the final product is not sized appropriately. As such, it can be necessary to modify process equipment to fit a wider roll of fleece, for example, to compensate for any shrinkage in the final product due to elongation.
- the nonwoven web can be point bonded after the first bonding (e.g., hydroentangling) is completed.
- a second bonding process can increase the tensile strength of the nonwoven web and reduce elongation characteristics.
- a point bonding process can bond a nonwoven web by partially or completely melting the web (e.g., the heat sealable binder material) at discrete points.
- the nonwoven web can be subjected to ultrasonic bonding after initial bonding of the web. Any ultrasonic bonding system for nonwoven materials known in the art can be used to ultrasonically bond the nonwoven web. See, for example, the apparatuses and devices disclosed in U.S.
- the nonwoven web can be subjected to point bonding via embossed and/or engraved calendar rolls, which are typically heated. See, e.g., the point bonding methods incorporating the use of very high calendar pressures and embossing techniques discussed in U.S. Pat. Publ. No. 2008/0249492 to Schmidt, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- the point bonding process is typically limited to less than about 60% of the surface area of the nonwoven web as noted above.
- the processing techniques used to blend, entangle and bond the nonwoven web can also impart a desired texture to the fibrous nonwoven web material.
- a desired texture e.g. a desired pattern
- This textured pattern can include product identifying information.
- the product identifying information is selected from the group consisting of product brand, a company name, a corporate logo, a corporate brand, a marketing message, product strength, active ingredient, product manufacture date, product expiration date, product flavor, product release profile, weight, product code (e.g., batch code), other product differentiating markings, and combinations thereof.
- US Publication No. 2012/0055493 to Novak, III et al. incorporated by reference in its entirety, relates to an apparatus and process for providing pouch material formed into a tube for use in the manufacture of smokeless tobacco products.
- the pouch material can include a binder material according to the present disclosure (e.g., a binder material comprising an aliphatic polyester).
- Similar apparatuses that incorporate equipment for supplying a continuous supply of a pouch material e.g., a pouch processing unit adapted to supply a pouch material to a continuous tube forming unit for forming a continuous tubular member from the pouch material
- a pouch processing unit adapted to supply a pouch material to a continuous tube forming unit for forming a continuous tubular member from the pouch material
- the apparatus further includes equipment for supplying pouched material to the continuous tubular member such that, when the continuous tubular member is subdivided and sealed into discrete pouch portions, each pouch portion includes a charge of a composition adapted for oral use.
- Representative equipment for supplying the filler material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0018539 to Brinkley, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the apparatus may include a subdividing unit for subdividing the continuous tubular member into individual pouch portions and, once subdivided into the individual pouch portions, may also include a sealing unit for sealing at least one of the ends of each pouch portion.
- the continuous tubular member may be sealed into individual pouch portions with a sealing unit and then, once the individual pouch portions are sealed, the continuous tubular member may be subdivided into discrete individual pouch portions by a subdividing unit subdividing the continuous tubular member between the sealed ends of serially-disposed pouch portions.
- sealing (closing) of the individual pouch portions of the continuous tubular member may occur substantially concurrently with the subdivision thereof, using a closing and dividing unit.
- an apparatus similar to that described in U.S. Publication No. 2012/0055493 can be configured to removably receive a first bobbin on an unwind spindle assembly, the first bobbin having a continuous length of a material, such as a pouch material, wound thereon.
- the pouch material can be routed from the first bobbin to a forming unit configured to form a continuous supply of the pouch material into a continuous tubular member defining a longitudinal axis.
- the pouch material can be directed around an arrangement of roller members, otherwise referred to herein as a dancer assembly.
- a forming unit can be configured to cooperate with the first bobbin and the dancer assembly to take up slack in the pouch material and to maintain a certain amount of longitudinal tension on the pouch material as the pouch material is unwound from the first bobbin and fed to the forming unit, for example, by a drive system.
- the pouch material can be supported, routed, and/or guided by a suitably aligned series of any number of, for example, idler rollers, guideposts, air bars, turning bars, guides, tracks, tunnels, or the like, for directing the pouch material along the desired path.
- Typical bobbins used by conventional automated pouch making apparatuses often contain a continuous strip of pouch material of which the length may vary.
- the apparatus described herein can be configured so as to handle bobbins of that type and size.
- the forming unit can include one or more roller members configured to direct the pouch material about a hollow shaft such that the continuous supply of the pouch material can be formed into a continuous tubular member.
- the forming unit can include a sealing device configured to seal, fix, or otherwise engage lateral edges of the pouch material to form a longitudinally-extending seam, thereby forming a longitudinally-extending continuous tubular member.
- an insertion unit can be configured to introduce charges of the composition adapted for oral use into the continuous tubular member through the hollow shaft. The insertion unit may be directly or indirectly engaged with the hollow shaft.
- a leading edge or end (also referred to as a laterally-extending seam) of the continuous tubular member can be closed/sealed such that a charge of composition adapted for oral use inserted by the insertion unit, is contained within the continuous tubular member proximate to the leading end.
- the leading end can be closed/sealed via a closing and dividing unit configured to close/seal a first portion of the continuous tubular member to form the closed leading end of a pouch member portion.
- the closing and dividing unit can also be configured to form a closed trailing edge or end of a previous pouch member portion.
- the closing and dividing unit can also be configured to close a second portion of the continuous tubular member to form the closed trailing end of the pouch member portion.
- the closing and dividing unit can close the ends, by heat-sealing, or other suitable sealing mechanism.
- the closing and dividing unit can be configured to divide the continuous tubular member, between the closed trailing end and the closed leading end of serially-disposed pouch member portions, along the longitudinal axis of the continuous tubular member, and into a plurality of discrete pouch member portions such that each discrete pouch member portion includes a portion of the oral composition from the insertion unit.
- the closing and dividing unit can include a blade, heated wire, or other cutting arrangement for severing the continuous tubular member into discrete pouch member portions.
- the closing and dividing unit can include first and second arm members configured to interact to close and divide the continuous tubular member.
- a charge of the composition adapted for oral use i.e., an amount suitable for an individual pouch member portion
- the discrete individual pouch member portion can be formed by closing the trailing end and severing the closed pouch member portion from the continuous tubular member such that an individual pouched product is formed.
- each pouch may vary.
- the weight of the mixture within each pouch is at least about 50 mg, for example, from about 50 mg to about 2 grams, from about 100 mg to about 1.5 grams, or from about 200 mg to about 700 mg.
- the dry weight of the material within each pouch is at least about 50 mg to about 150 mg.
- the dry weight of the material within each pouch preferably does not exceed about 300 mg to about 500 mg.
- each pouch/container may have disposed therein a flavor agent member, as described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- At least one flavored strip, piece or sheet of flavored water dispersible or water soluble material may be disposed within each pouch along with or without at least one capsule.
- flavored water dispersible or water soluble material e.g., a breath-freshening edible film type of material
- Such strips or sheets may be folded or crumpled in order to be readily incorporated within the pouch. See, for example, the types of materials and technologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,887,307 to Scott et al. and 6,923,981 to Leung et al.; and The EFSA Journal (2004) 85, 1-32; which are incorporated herein by reference. It is noted that fill volume in some embodiments is about 75% to about 100%.
- the nonwoven web can be sufficiently tacky so as to create issues with high-speed pouching equipment. Therefore, in certain embodiments, a Teflon coating, or similar material, can be applied to one or more surfaces of the pouching equipment that touch the nonwoven web such as, for example, rollers, cutting instruments, and heat sealing devices in order to reduce and/or alleviate any problems associated with the pouch material sticking to the pouching equipment during processing.
- the pouched products can further include product identifying information printed or dyed on the outer water-permeable pouch or imprinted (e.g., embossed, debossed, or otherwise pressed) on the outer water-permeable pouch, such as described in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0255452 to Reddick et al., filed Mar. 11, 2013, which is incorporated by reference herein.
- flavorants can also be incorporated into the nonwoven web if desired, such as by coating or printing an edible flavorant ink onto the nonwoven web. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos. 2012/0085360 to Kawata et al. and 2012/0103353 to Sebastian et al., each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
- a largest dimension is about 16 to about 40 mm or about 20 to about 40 mm, e.g., about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, about 20 mm, about 21 mm, about 22 mm, about 23 mm, about 24 mm, about 25 mm, about 26 mm, about 27 mm, about 28 mm, about 29 mm, 30 mm, about 31 mm, about 32 mm, about 33 mm, about 34 mm, about 35 mm, about 36 mm, about 37 mm, about 38 mm, about 39 mm, or about 40 mm.
- the largest perpendicular dimension to the length is about 8 to about 20 mm or about 10 to about 20 mm, e.g., about 8 mm, about 9 mm, about 10 mm, about 11 mm, about 12 mm, about 13 mm, about 14 mm, about 15 mm, about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, or about 20 mm.
- Certain non-limiting embodiments have rough largest dimensions of about 38 mm (length) ⁇ about 18 mm (width); about 37.5 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (width); about 38 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (length); about 33 mm (length) ⁇ about 18 mm (width); about 33 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (length), about 31 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (width), about 30 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (width), about 29 mm (length) ⁇ about 14 mm (width), about 28 mm (length) ⁇ about 13 mm (width), about 28 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (width), about 27 mm (length) ⁇ about 16 mm (width), about 24 mm (length) ⁇ about 12 mm (width) and about 22 mm (length) ⁇ about 13 mm (width).
- the third dimension (thickness, T, not shown in FIG. 1 ), understood to represent the 3-dimensional thickness of the products, can vary.
- the thickness can vary, e.g., from about 1 mm to about 20 mm or about 2 mm to about 10 mm, although the disclosure is not limited thereto.
- thicknesses include, e.g., about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 7 mm, about 8 mm, about 9 mm, about 10 mm, about 11 mm, about 12 mm, about 13 mm, about 14 mm, about 15 mm, about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, or about 20 mm at the pouch's thickest point.
- the total length, width, and thickness of the pouched product is about 130 mm or less, about 120 mm or less, about 110 mm or less, about 100 mm or less, about 90 mm or less, about 80 mm or less, about 70 mm or less, about 60 mm or less, about 50 mm or less, or about 40 mm or less, e.g., about 30 mm to about 130 mm, about 30 mm to about 100 mm, about 50 to about 100 mm, or about 50 to about 70 mm.
- the thickness of such pouched products is about 8 mm or less.
- Surface area of certain pouches is about 900 mm 2 or less, about 800 mm 2 or less, about 700 mm 2 or less, about 600 mm 2 or less, about 500 mm 2 or less, about 400 mm 2 or less, about 300 mm 2 or less, about 250 mm 2 or less, about 200 mm 2 or less, or about 150 mm 2 or less (e.g., with a minimum of about 100 mm 2 in some embodiments).
- the disclosed pouches have a length L of about 35 to about 60 mm and a width W of about 8 to about 18 mm.
- Certain, non-limiting examples of pouches provided herein are as follows: a pouch with L ⁇ 35 mm and W ⁇ 8 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 35 mm and W ⁇ 10 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 35 mm and W ⁇ 12 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 35 mm and W ⁇ 14 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 35 mm and W ⁇ 16 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 40 mm and W ⁇ 8 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 40 mm and W ⁇ 10 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 40 mm and W ⁇ 12 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 40 mm and W ⁇ 14 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 40 mm and W ⁇ 16 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 50 mm and W ⁇ 8 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 50 mm and W ⁇ 10 mm, a pouch with L ⁇ 50 mm and W
- a length L of about 35 mm to about 60 mm such as about 40 mm to about 60 mm, about 50 mm to about 60 mm, about 35 mm to about 50 mm, and about 35 mm to about 40 mm
- a width W of about 8 mm to about 16 mm such as about 8 mm to about 14 mm, about 8 mm to about 12 mm, about 8 mm to about 10 mm, about 9 mm to about 16 mm, about 9 mm to about 14 mm, about 9 mm to about 12 mm, about 9 mm to about 10 mm, about 10 mm to about 16 mm, about 10 mm to about 14 mm, about 10 mm to about 12 mm, or about 14 to about 16.
- the total measurements for the length, width, and thickness are within the following ranges.
- the total length, width, and thickness of a large pouch as provided herein is about 90 mm or greater, about 100 mm or greater, about 110 mm or greater, about 120 mm or greater, about 130 mm or greater, about 140 mm or greater, or about 150 mm or greater.
- the thickness of such pouches is about 2 mm or greater (e.g., between about 2 and about 8 mm).
- Surface area of certain pouches is about 300 mm 2 or greater, about 400 mm 2 or greater, about 500 mm 2 or greater, about 600 mm 2 or greater, or about 700 mm 2 or greater (e.g., with a maximum of about 1000 mm 2 ), although the disclosure is not limited thereto.
- a pouched product as described herein can be packaged within any suitable inner packaging material and/or outer container. See also, for example, the various types of containers for smokeless types of products that are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 7,014,039 to Henson et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,537,110 to Kutsch et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,584,843 to Kutsch et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 8,397,945 to Gelardi et al., D592,956 to Thiellier; D594,154 to Patel et al.; and D625,178 to Bailey et al.; US Pat. Pub. Nos.
- Products of the present disclosure configured for oral use may be packaged and stored in any suitable packaging in much the same manner that conventional types of smokeless tobacco products are packaged and stored.
- a plurality of packets or pouches may be contained in a cylindrical container.
- the storage period of the product after preparation may vary.
- “storage period” refers to the period of time after the preparation of the disclosed product.
- one or more of the characteristics of the products disclosed herein e.g., retention of whiteness, lack of color change, retention of volatile flavor components
- the storage period i.e., the time period after preparation
- the storage period is from about 1 day, about 2 days, or about 3 days, to about 1 week, or from about 1 week to about 2 weeks, from about 2 weeks to about 1 month, from about 1 month to about 2 months, from about 2 months to about 3 months, from about 3 months to about 4 months, or from about 4 months to about 5 months.
- the storage period is any number of days between about 1 and about 150.
- the storage period may be longer than 5 months, for example, at least about 6 months, at least about 7 months, at least about 8 months, at least about 9 months, at least about 10 months, at least about 11 months, or at least about 12 months.
- compositions and corresponding nonwoven pouched products were produced, according to the following Examples.
- a first series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components (along with corresponding comparative pouches, with only one nicotine component, i.e., no nicotine-polymer complex).
- the composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 1 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- Entries indicated as “Control” are comparative samples that contain no nicotine polacrilex, and entries indicated as “Sample” contain both nicotine and nicotine polacrilex (as well as NaOH).
- a second series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components.
- the composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 2 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, sweetener (acesulfame-K or sucralose), and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 5M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-600 mg of the mixture (depending, e.g., on the size of the pouch) was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of 32%.
- a third series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components.
- the composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 3 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, sweetener (acesulfame-K or sucralose), and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 5M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-500 mg of the mixture was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of about 45-50%.
- a fourth series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components.
- the composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 4 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, acesulfame-K, and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 6M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-500 mg of the mixture was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of about 45-50%.
- Example 5 Evaluation of Nicotine Release from Nicotine Polacrilex in the Presence of Sodium Hydroxide or Calcium Hydroxide
- FIG. 2 depicts nicotine release from nicotine polacrilex in aqueous solution using sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide.
- FIG. 2 shows that calcium hydroxide can effectively raise the pH of the solution and at lower pH values, enhance the release of nicotine relative to a solution of sodium hydroxide at the same pH value. This data encompasses a resulting pH range of about 3.96 to about 7.92.
- Aqueous solutions of various sodium and calcium salts in combination with nicotine polacrilex (20% nicotine by weight) were prepared by stirring components for 10 minutes. 1 mL aliquots were taken and analyzed for nicotine concentration. The amount of each respective salt included in each solution was varied to provide a range of calculated ionic strengths for each salt/nicotine polacrilex solution, and varied between about 1 and about 300 millimoles per liter. A chart of the nicotine release versus ionic strength for such samples is provided in FIG. 3 .
- Formulations comprising nicotine polacrilex (20% nicotine by weight), alone and in the presence of various salts and combinations thereof were prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided to Table 5.
- Aqueous solutions were prepared by stirring the components for 10 minutes, and then 1 mL aliquots were taken and analyzed for nicotine concentration.
- Nicotine polacrilex/Salt Samples Nicotine polacrilex Example (grams) Salt (grams) Powder A 1 Powder B 1 Sodium chloride (0.5) Powder C 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4) Powder D 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4), Calcium glycerolphosphate (0.6) Powder E 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4), Calcium glycerolphosphate (1.2)
- Nicotine polacrilex alone in aqueous solution was found to release only about 4.4% of the available nicotine, and the pH of the solution was about 7.75.
- addition of salts to the water during dissolution enhanced release of the nicotine from the polacrilex resin and also lowered the pH of the resulting solutions.
- a chart of the nicotine release versus ionic strength for each powder is provided as FIG. 4 . With reference to FIG. 4 , nicotine release increased with increasing ionic strength.
- the solutions including calcium chloride or calcium lactate gluconate provided the greatest nicotine release, with greater release of nicotine from nicotine polacrilex than is achievable by pH adjustment alone (shown within the region surrounded by a dotted line). For example, 60% of greater release of nicotine was observed when bound to polacrilex with a multivalent cation salt such as calcium lactate gluconate (1:1).
- the pH of the various solutions ranged from about 3.96 to about 7.92 (data not shown)
- each respective salt included in each solution was varied to provide a range of calculated ionic strengths for each salt/nicotine polacrilex solution, and varied between about 1 and about 300 millimoles per liter.
- Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and various salts (Pouches AA, AB, AC, and AD) were prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively.
- For each pouch about 462 mg of the corresponding composition was used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch was sprayed with water to provide the desired moisture content.
- the final pouch weight for each pouch was about 700 mg.
- Nicotine release from the pouched products comprising the nicotine polacrilex/salt-containing formulations provided in Tables 6-9 was evaluated (with no pH adjustment), as shown in FIG. 5 .
- Each of the pouches was cut open and added to complete artificial saliva (“CAS”) (1 mL CAS per 300 mg sample). Each solution was then placed on a heated rotary shaker set at 250 rpm for about 2 hours and held at a temperature of 37° C. An aliquot of each solution was removed and analyzed for nicotine concentration. Percent release of nicotine was calculated as the ratio of nicotine analyzed versus theoretical nicotine present. Log D and pH were determined for pouches AA, AB, AC, and AD (See Table 10).
- Pouch AD uses calcium lactate gluconate as a nicotine release enhancing agent and also contains sodium benzoate (believed to be capable of leading to in situ formation of a nicotine ion pair); pouch AD displays a positive logD value.
- Pouch AC uses calcium glycerolphosphate as a nicotine release enhancing agent and enhances the release of nicotine, although the logP of pouch AC is less preferred than that of pouch AD. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that pouch AC may have a lower log D than AD due to the lower water solubility of calcium glycerolphosphate versus calcium lactate gluconate (1:1) and/or higher application amount of the calcium glycerolphosphate versus calcium lactate gluconate (1:1), leading to possible interference in nicotine ion pair formation.
- FIG. 5 also provides results for nicotine release versus pH of the test solution for certain powder compositions.
- Powders B and C from Table 5 were each separately added to 500 milliliters of deionized water in an amount sufficient to provide a solution calculated to theoretically contain 400 ppm nicotine (calculated as the free base and 100% release of theoretical nicotine). Each solution was stirred for 10 minutes, and then a one milliliter aliquot of each solution was removed and analyzed for nicotine concentration. Each solution was pH adjusted to provide a range of pH values from about 7 to 12 using either 1M NaOH (for pH ranges 7-9) or 5M NaOH (pH values of about 11-12). Percent release of nicotine was calculated as the ratio of nicotine analyzed versus theoretical quantity of nicotine present.
- the pouched composition examples comprising a calcium salt (Pouches AC and AD) provided improved nicotine release ( ⁇ 70%) at acidic pH (e.g., about 6) relative to the compositions of Pouches AA and AB and the powder compositions which contained either nicotine polacrilex and sodium chloride alone (Powder B) or nicotine polacrilex, sodium chloride, and sodium benzoate (Powder C).
- the calcium salts were found to effectively raise the pH of the solution and at lower pH values, enhance the release of nicotine relative to a solution of sodium hydroxide at the same pH value.
- nicotine release from the compositions of Powders B and C was only about 40% at pH around 6.
- Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and nicotine along with various salts are prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 11 and 12. For each pouch, about 330 mg of the corresponding composition is used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch is sprayed with water to provide the desired moisture content. The final pouch weight for each pouch is about 500 mg.
- the expected pH of the pouch composition upon dissolution is in a range from about 5.5 to about 6.5, and the expected log D is positive.
- Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and nicotine along with either sodium hydroxide or calcium hydroxide as the pH adjusting agent (Pouches BA and BB respectively) are prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 13 and 14. For each pouch, about 330-340 mg of the corresponding composition is used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch sprayed with water to a final weight of about 500 mg. Each pouch has dimensions of about 30 ⁇ 12 with 10 mg nicotine per pouch. The expected pH of the pouch composition is in a range from about 8.5 to about 9.0.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Agronomy & Crop Science (AREA)
- Botany (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
Products containing a nicotine-polymer complex are provided herein, which can optionally further include one or more, different nicotine components. Certain such products are pouched products including an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity containing a composition comprising a water-soluble component capable of being released through the water-permeable pouch. The disclosure further provides methods of preparing such products.
Description
- The present application claims priority to and the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/279,669, filed Nov. 15, 2021 and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/421,473, filed Nov. 1, 2022, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- The present disclosure relates to products intended for human use. The products are configured for oral use and deliver substances such as flavors and/or active ingredients during use.
- Such products may include tobacco or a product derived from tobacco, or may be tobacco-free alternatives.
- There are many categories of products intended for oral use and enjoyment. For example, oral tobacco products containing nicotine, which is known to have both stimulant and anxiolytic properties, have been available for many years. Conventional formats for so-called “smokeless” tobacco products include moist snuff, snus, and chewing tobacco, which are typically formed almost entirely of particulate, granular, or shredded tobacco, and which are either portioned by the user or presented to the user in individual portions, such as in single-use pouches or sachets. See for example, the types of smokeless tobacco formulations, ingredients, and processing methodologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,668,839 to Williams; U.S. Pat. No. 6,834,654 to Williams; U.S. Pat. No. 6,953,040 to Atchley et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,032,601 to Atchley et al.; and 7,694,686 to Atchley et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,810,507 to Dube et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,819,124 to Strickland et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al.; 7,901,512 to Quinter et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 8,627,828 to Strickland et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 11,246,334 to Atchley, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- In addition, traditional tobacco materials and non-tobacco materials have been combined with other ingredients to form product formats distinct from traditional smokeless products, with example formats including lozenges, pastilles, gels, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos. 2008/0196730 to Engstrom et al.; 2008/0305216 to Crawford et al.; 2009/0293889 to Kumar et al.; 2010/0291245 to Gao et al; 2011/0139164 to Mua et al.; 2012/0037175 to Cantrell et al.; 2012/0055494 to Hunt et al.; 2012/0138073 to Cantrell et al.; 2012/0138074 to Cantrell et al.; 2013/0074855 to Holton, Jr.; 2013/0074856 to Holton, Jr.; 2013/0152953 to Mua et al.; 2013/0274296 to Jackson et al.; 2015/0068545 to Moldoveanu et al.; 2015/0101627 to Marshall et al.; and 2015/0230515 to Lampe et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- There is continuing interest in the development of new types of oral products that deliver advantageous sensorial or biological activity. Such products typically contain flavorants and/or active ingredients such as nicotine, caffeine, botanicals, or cannabidiol. The format of such products can vary, and include pouched products containing a powdered or granular composition, lozenges, pastilles, liquids, gels, emulsions, meltable compositions, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos. 2022/0160675 to Gerardi et al.; 2022/0071984 to Poole et al.; 2021/0378948 to Gerardi et al.; 2021/0330590 to Hutchens et al.; 2021/0186081 to Gerardi et al.; 2021/0177754 to Keller et al; 2021/0177043 to Gerardi et al.; 2021/0177038 to Gerardi et al.; 2021/0169867 to Holton, Jr. et al.; 2021/0169792 to Holton, Jr. et al.; 2021/0169132 to Holton, Jr. et al.; 2021/0169121 to St. Charles, and 2021/0169122 to St. Charles, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The present disclosure relates to products incorporating a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex. In some embodiments, the products comprise two or more, different nicotine components (including at least one such component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex). Although not intending to be limited by theory, it is believed that by incorporating the nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex (and/or by incorporating nicotine in the form of two or more different nicotine components within a single product), the nicotine release profile within a consumer's oral cavity can be modified (e.g., extended) as compared with that of a product comprising nicotine in other forms or nicotine in only one form, respectively. In some embodiments, the inclusion of nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and/or as two or more nicotine components within a single product can further improve the shelf life of the product. Some such products are pouched products including an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity containing a composition comprising a water-soluble component capable of being released through the water-permeable pouch.
- The composition within the cavity of the pouch can contain a nicotine component comprising nicotine in the form of a nicotine complex (e.g., a nicotine polymer complex, e.g., wherein the polymer comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin). The composition within the cavity of the pouch can contain the nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex as a first nicotine component, and can further comprise a second, different nicotine component (e.g., in the form of a nicotine extract such as a tobacco-derived nicotine extract or in the form of synthetic nicotine) and/or a nicotine salt. The composition within the cavity can further comprise various components, including, but not limited to, flavorants, sweeteners, fillers, and the like. In some embodiments, the composition within the cavity further comprises an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salt, e.g., comprising calcium or magnesium. In some embodiments, the composition within the cavity may further comprise other salts.
- In some embodiments, at least a portion of the alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salt is a salt of an organic acid. In some embodiments, the composition comprises a calcium salt of an organic acid. In some embodiments, the calcium salt is calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate. In some embodiments, the calcium salt is calcium benzoate. In some embodiments, the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate. In other embodiments, the composition comprises benzoic acid and calcium hydroxide, wherein calcium benzoate is formed in situ in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof.
- In some embodiments, the composition comprises benzoic acid, sodium benzoate, calcium benzoate, or a combination thereof, and further comprises an additional alkali metal salt, alkaline earth metal salt, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises calcium. In some embodiments, the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises calcium and an additional organic acid. In some embodiments, the additional alkaline earth metal salt comprises lactic acid, gluconic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises calcium lactate gluconate.
- In some embodiments, at least a portion of the alkali metal salt of the organic acid, the alkaline earth metal salt of the organic acid, or both, where present, is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine-polymer complex in the form of a salt, an ion pair, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, at least about 40%, or at least about 60% of the nicotine present in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex is released from the composition when a sample of the composition is added to a volume of water and agitated using a rotary shaker at 250 RPM for a period of two hours and at a temperature of 37° C., forming a solution comprising nicotine. In some embodiments, the solution has a pH from about 5.0 to about 6.5. In some embodiments, the solution has a LogD greater than zero.
- In various embodiments, the composition within the cavity of the pouch is a smokeless tobacco product or nicotine replacement therapy product. In some embodiments, the composition within the cavity of the pouch can be a particulate material adapted for steeping or brewing (i.e., configured for liquid extraction), such as a tea or coffee material. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the composition within the cavity of the pouch can comprise a particulate or fibrous plant material such as would be found in various teas or tea variants. In some embodiments, the composition within the cavity can comprise a flavor component such that flavor can be added to a liquid (e.g., water).
- The invention includes, without limitation, the following embodiments.
- Embodiment 1: A pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, the pouched product having a total moisture content of about 5% or greater, wherein the composition comprises a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex.
- Embodiment 2: The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the nicotine component is the only nicotine component contained within the composition.
- Embodiment 3: The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the nicotine component is a first nicotine component and the composition further comprises a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 4: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the total moisture content of the pouched product is about 5% or greater, about 10% or greater, about 15% or greater, about 25% or greater, or about 30% or greater.
- Embodiment 5: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the total moisture content is about 48% or less, about 40% or less, about 30% or less, about 25% or less, about 20% or less, about 15% or less, or about 10% or less.
- Embodiment 6: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein the first nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 2% to about 15% by weight and the second nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 0.5% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- Embodiment 7: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a higher weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 8: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 5, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a lower weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 9: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 8, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin.
- Embodiment 10: The pouched product of Embodiment 9, wherein the polymeric cation exchange resin comprises a polyacrylic polymer.
- Embodiment 11: The pouched product of Embodiment 9, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
- Embodiment 12: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is a tobacco-derived nicotine extract.
- Embodiment 13: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is synthetic nicotine.
- Embodiment 14: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 11, wherein the second nicotine component is a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 15: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 3 to 14, wherein at least a portion of the second nicotine component is in the form of a particulate non-tobacco material treated to contain the second nicotine component, and fibrous plant material carrying the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 16: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 15, wherein the composition comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of one or more additional fillers, binders, pH adjusters, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, and preservatives.
- Embodiment 17: The pouched product of Embodiment 16, wherein the composition comprises a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- Embodiment 18: The pouched product of Embodiment 17, wherein the composition comprises calcium hydroxide.
- Embodiment 19: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of about 6-9.
- Embodiment 20: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 6.5.
- Embodiment 21: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 5.
- Embodiment 22: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 21, wherein the composition comprises about 5% or more of a humectant.
- Embodiment 23: The pouched product of Embodiment 22, wherein the humectant comprises glycerol.
- Embodiment 24: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 23, further comprising one or more alkali metal salts, one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 25 The pouched product of Embodiment 24, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts are salts of organic acids.
- Embodiment 26: The pouched product of Embodiment 25, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt and/or magnesium salt.
- Embodiment 27: The pouched product of Embodiment 25, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt.
- Embodiment 28: The pouched product of Embodiment 27, wherein the calcium salt is selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 29: The pouched product of Embodiment 28, wherein the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate.
- Embodiment 30: The pouched product of Embodiment 28, wherein the calcium salt is calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 31: The pouched product of
Embodiment 30, wherein the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate. - Embodiment 32: The pouched product of
Embodiment 30, wherein the calcium benzoate is formed in situ with calcium hydroxide and benzoic acid present in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof. Embodiment 33: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 24 to 32, wherein at least a portion of the one or more alkali metal salts of the one or more organic acids, one or more alkaline earth metal salts of the one or more organic acids, or any combination thereof is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine component in the form of an ion pair. - Embodiment 34: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 33, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is present in the form of particles.
- Embodiment 35: The pouched product of Embodiment 34, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 25 microns to about 500 microns.
- Embodiment 36: The pouched product of Embodiment 35, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 200 microns to about 400 microns.
- Embodiment 37: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 36, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of less than about 5 microns.
- Embodiment 38: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 37, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of greater than about 1000 microns.
- Embodiment 39: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 38, wherein the particles exhibit a multimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 40: The pouched product of Embodiment 39, wherein the particles exhibit a bimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 41: The pouched product of
Embodiment 40, wherein the bimodal particle size distribution comprises a first mode with a peak at about 75 to about 125 micrometers or about 80 to about 110 micrometers and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to about 1000 micrometers or about 700 to about 1000 micrometers. - Embodiment 42: The pouched product of Embodiment 41, wherein more particles are present within the first mode than within the second mode.
- Embodiment 43: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 42, wherein the particles are uncoated.
- Embodiment 44: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 34 to 42, wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising one or more filling components and/or one or more pH adjusters.
- Embodiment 45: The pouched product of Embodiment 44, wherein the one or more filling components comprise mannitol and the one or more pH adjusters comprise sodium carbonate.
- Embodiment 46: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 45, wherein the pouched product has a total moisture content of about 48% or less, a total moisture content of about 40% or less, a total moisture content of about 30% or less, or a total moisture content of about 20% or less.
- Embodiment 47: The pouched product of any of Embodiments 1 to 45, wherein the pouched product has a total moisture content of about 1% to about 40%, about 1% to about 30%, about 1% to about 20%, or about 1% to about 10%.
- Embodiment 48: A composition, comprising a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt, wherein the composition is in the form of a pouched product.
- Embodiment 49: The composition of Embodiment 48, wherein the first nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 2% to about 15% by weight and the second nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 0.5% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- Embodiment 50: The composition of Embodiment 48 or 49, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a higher weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 51: The composition of Embodiment 48 or 49, wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a lower weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 52: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 51, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin.
- Embodiment 53: The composition of Embodiment 52, wherein the polymeric cation exchange resin comprises a polyacrylic polymer.
- Embodiment 54: The composition of Embodiment 52, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
- Embodiment 55: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is a tobacco-derived nicotine extract.
- Embodiment 56: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is synthetic nicotine.
- Embodiment 57: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 54, wherein the second nicotine component is a nicotine salt.
- Embodiment 58: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 57, wherein at least a portion of the second nicotine component is in the form of a particulate non-tobacco material treated to contain the second nicotine component, and fibrous plant material carrying the second nicotine component.
- Embodiment 59: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 58, wherein the composition comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of one or more additional fillers, binders, pH adjusters, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, and preservatives.
- Embodiment 60: The composition of Embodiment 59, wherein the composition comprises a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
- Embodiment 61: The composition of
Embodiment 60, wherein the composition comprises calcium hydroxide. - Embodiment 62: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of about 7-9.
- Embodiment 63: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 6.5.
- Embodiment 64: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 61, wherein the composition has a pH of less than about 5.
- Embodiment 65: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 64, wherein the composition comprises about 5% or more of a humectant.
- Embodiment 66: The composition of Embodiment 65, wherein the humectant comprises glycerol.
- Embodiment 67: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 66, further comprising one or more alkali metal salts, one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 68: The composition of Embodiment 67, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts are salts of organic acids.
- Embodiment 69: The composition of Embodiment 67 or 68, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or the one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt and/or a magnesium salt.
- Embodiment 70: The composition of Embodiment 69, wherein the one or more alkali metal salts and/or one or more alkaline earth metal salts comprise a calcium salt.
- Embodiment 71: The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or any combination thereof.
- Embodiment 72: The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is calcium lactate gluconate.
- Embodiment 73: The composition of Embodiment 70, wherein the calcium salt is calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 74: The composition of Embodiment 73, wherein the calcium benzoate is present as discrete calcium benzoate.
- Embodiment 75: The composition of Embodiment 73, wherein the calcium benzoate is formed in situ with calcium hydroxide and benzoic acid present in the composition during preparation and/or use thereof.
- Embodiment 76: The composition of any of Embodiments 67 to 75, wherein at least a portion of the one or more alkali metal salts, the one or more alkaline earth metal salts, or any combination thereof is associated with at least a portion of the nicotine component in the form of an ion pair.
- Embodiment 77: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 76, wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is present in the form of particles.
- Embodiment 78: The composition of Embodiment 77, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 25 microns to about 500 microns.
- Embodiment 79: The composition of Embodiment 77, wherein the particles have an average particle size of about 200 microns to about 400 microns.
- Embodiment 80: The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 79, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of less than about 5 microns.
- Embodiment 81: The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 79, wherein less than 2% of the particles by volume or less than 1% of the particles by volume have a particle size of greater than about 1000 microns.
- Embodiment 82: The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 81, wherein the particles exhibit a multimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 83: The composition of Embodiment 82, wherein the particles exhibit a bimodal particle size distribution.
- Embodiment 84: The composition of Embodiment 83, wherein the bimodal particle size distribution comprises a first mode with a peak at about 75 to about 125 micrometers or about 80 to about 110 micrometers and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to about 1000 micrometers or about 700 to about 1000 micrometers.
- Embodiment 85: The composition of Embodiment 84, wherein more particles are present within the first mode than within the second mode.
- Embodiment 86: The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 85, wherein the particles are uncoated.
- Embodiment 87: The composition of any of Embodiments 77 to 85, wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising one or more filling components and/or one or more pH adjusters.
- Embodiment 88: The composition of Embodiment 87, wherein the one or more filling components comprise mannitol and the one or more pH adjusters comprise sodium carbonate.
- Embodiment 89: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 88, wherein the composition has a total moisture content of about 40% or less, a total moisture content of about 30% or less, or a total moisture content of about 20% or less.
- Embodiment 90: The composition of any of Embodiments 48 to 88, wherein the composition has a total moisture content of about 1% to about 40%, about 1% to about 30%, about 1% to about 20%, or about 1% to about 10%.
- Embodiment 91: A method of providing a pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 5% or greater.
- Embodiment 92: A method of providing a moist pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form oft a nicotine-polymer complex; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 25% or greater.
- Embodiment 93: A method of providing a pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of two or more different nicotine components, comprising: a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 5% or greater.
- Embodiment 94: A method of providing a moist pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising: incorporating nicotine in the form of two or more different nicotine components, comprising: a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt; and incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 25% or greater.
- These and other features, aspects, and advantages of the disclosure will be apparent from a reading of the following detailed description together with the accompanying drawings, which are briefly described below. The invention includes any combination of two, three, four, or more of the above-noted embodiments as well as combinations of any two, three, four, or more features or elements set forth in this disclosure, regardless of whether such features or elements are expressly combined in a specific embodiment description herein. This disclosure is intended to be read holistically such that any separable features or elements of the disclosed invention, in any of its various aspects and embodiments, should be viewed as intended to be combinable unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
- Having thus described aspects of the disclosure in the foregoing general terms, reference will now be made to the accompanying drawing, which is not necessarily drawn to scale. The drawing is an example only, and should not be construed as limiting the disclosure.
-
FIG. 1 is a front perspective view illustrating a pouched product according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 2 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus pH for resin-bound nicotine in combination with sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide according to example embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 3 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus ionic strength for resin-bound nicotine in combination with various sodium and calcium salts according to example embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 4 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine release versus ionic strength for resin-bound nicotine in combination with various salts and combinations of salts according to example embodiments of the present disclosure; and -
FIG. 5 is a graphical depiction of % nicotine and pH values for resin bound nicotine in combination with various salts, and for pouched products according to example embodiments of the present disclosure. - The present invention now will be described more fully hereinafter. This invention may, however, be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will be thorough and complete, and will fully convey the scope of the invention to those skilled in the art. As used in this specification and the claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
- The compositions and products of the disclosure generally comprise a nicotine-polymer complex. In some embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole source of nicotine in the compositions and products. In some embodiments, the compositions and products comprise at least two, different nicotine components (including a nicotine-polymer complex). It is noted that this disclosure is not intended to be limited thereto, and in some embodiments, such compositions and products can include more than two, different nicotine components (e.g., three, four, or more different nicotine components), including the nicotine-polymer complex.
- The disclosure generally provides compositions and products configured for oral use. The term “configured for oral use” as used herein means that the product is provided in a form such that during use, saliva in the mouth of the user causes one or more of the components of the mixture (e.g., flavoring agents and/or nicotine) to pass into the mouth of the user. In certain embodiments, the product is adapted to deliver components to a user through mucous membranes in the user's mouth, the user's digestive system, or both and, in some instances, said component is an active ingredient (including, but not limited to, for example, nicotine) that can be absorbed through the mucous membranes in the mouth or absorbed through the digestive tract when the product is used. Certain compositions or products of the present disclosure may be dissolvable. As used herein, the terms “dissolve,” “dissolving,” and “dissolvable” refer to compositions having aqueous-soluble components that interact with moisture in the oral cavity and enter into solution, thereby causing gradual consumption of the composition. According to one aspect, the dissolvable composition is capable of lasting in the user's mouth for a given period of time until it completely dissolves. Dissolution rates can vary over a wide range, from about 1 minute or less to about 60 minutes. For example, fast release compositions typically dissolve and/or release the desired component(s) (e.g., active ingredient, flavor, and the like) in about 2 minutes or less, often about 1 minute or less (e.g., about 50 seconds or less, about 40 seconds or less, about 30 seconds or less, or about 20 seconds or less). Dissolution can occur by any means, such as melting, mechanical disruption (e.g., chewing), enzymatic or other chemical degradation, or by disruption of the interaction between the components of the composition. In other embodiments, the products do not dissolve during the product's residence in the user's mouth.
- In some embodiments, the disclosure provides products in the form of a mixture of one or more components (including a nicotine-polymer complex, as described further herein), disposed within a moisture-permeable container (e.g., a water-permeable pouch). Pouched products generally comprise, in addition to the pouch-based exterior, a mixture within the pouch that typically comprises (in addition to the two or more different nicotine components as described herein), one or more fillers, one or more flavorants, and various other optional ingredients. The composition of the material within the pouches provided herein is not particularly limited, and can comprise, in addition to the nicotine-polymer complex (alone or in combination with one or more different nicotine sources), any filling composition, including those included within conventional pouched produces. Such compositions are generally mixtures of two or more components and as such, the compositions are, in some cases, referenced herein below as “mixtures.” Certain components that can advantageously be included in the mixtures within certain embodiments of the pouches provided herein are outlined generally below; however, it is to be understood that the discussion is not intended to be limiting of the components that can be incorporated within the disclosed pouches.
- Such mixtures in the water-permeable pouch format are typically used by placing a pouch containing the mixture in the mouth of a human subject/user. Generally, the pouch is placed somewhere in the oral cavity of the user, for example under the lips, in the same way as moist snuff products are generally used. The pouch preferably is not chewed or swallowed. Exposure to saliva then causes some of the components of the mixture therein (e.g., flavoring agents and/or the nicotine) to pass through e.g., the water-permeable pouch and provide the user with flavor and satisfaction, and the user is not required to spit out any portion of the mixture. After about 10 minutes to about 60 minutes, typically about 15 minutes to about 45 minutes, of use/enjoyment, substantial amounts of the mixture have been ingested by the human subject, and the pouch may be removed from the mouth of the consumer for disposal. Preferred pouch materials for products described herein may be designed and manufactured such that under conditions of normal use, a significant amount of the contents of the formulation within the pouch permeate through the pouch material prior to the time that the pouch undergoes loss of its physical integrity.
- For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 1 , an example pouched product 10 can comprise an outer water-permeable container 20 in the form of a pouch which contains a particulate mixture 15 adapted for oral use (wherein particulate mixture 15 comprises a nicotine-polymer complex as described herein). The orientation, size, and type of outer water-permeable pouch and the type and nature of the composition adapted for oral use that are illustrated herein are not construed as limiting thereof. Certain examples of components incorporated within particulate mixture 15 are described herein below, followed by disclosure relating to suitable outer, water-permeable containers 20 to form pouched products 10. - As referenced herein above, compositions and products are provided herein which contain at least one nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex. In some such compositions and products, the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole nicotine component within the composition and/or product. In other embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex is included in the composition or product along with one or more other types of nicotine components.
- By “nicotine component” is meant any suitable form of nicotine (e.g., free base or salt) for providing oral absorption of at least a portion of the nicotine present. Various nicotinic compounds, and methods for their administration, are set forth in US Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0274628 to Borschke, which is incorporated herein by reference. As used herein, “nicotinic compound” often refers to naturally occurring or synthetic nicotinic compound unbound from a plant material, meaning the compound is at least partially purified and not contained within a plant structure, such as a tobacco leaf.
- The nicotine, in some embodiments, is naturally occurring and obtained as an extract from a Nicotiana species (e.g., tobacco). The nicotine can be, for example, in the form of a highly purified tobacco extract. Various methods are known for the isolation and purification of nicotine from tobacco (including, but not limited to, extraction from tobacco with water; extraction from tobacco with organic solvents; steam distillation from tobacco; or pyrolytic degradation of tobacco and distillation of nicotine therefrom). For exemplary extraction methods, see for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,822,306 and 4,153,063 to Roselius et al. and US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2008/0302377 to Kauryzbaev et al., which are incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, nicotine may be obtained from another source (e.g., another type of plant).
- In some embodiments, nicotine may be synthetically made. The method by which synthetic nicotine used in some embodiments of the compositions and products described herein is synthesized can vary and is not particularly limited. Various methods for the preparation of nicotine are known. See, e.g., Florence L. Wagner et al., 63 Tetrahedron 8065 (2007); U.S. Pat. No. 10,913,962 to McCague et al.; and U.S. Patent App. Pub. No. 2020/0331884 to Weber et al., which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- The nicotine can have the enantiomeric form S(−)-nicotine, R(+)-nicotine, or a mixture of S(−)-nicotine and R(+)-nicotine. Most preferably, the nicotine is in the form of S(−)-nicotine (e.g., in a form that is virtually all S(−)-nicotine) or a racemic mixture composed primarily or predominantly of S(−)-nicotine (e.g., a mixture composed of about 95 weight parts S(−)-nicotine and about 5 weight parts R(+)-nicotine). Most preferably, the nicotine is employed in virtually pure form or in an essentially pure form. Highly preferred nicotine that is employed has a purity of greater than about 95 percent, more preferably greater than about 98 percent, and most preferably greater than about 99 percent, on a weight basis.
- As referenced, the compositions and products according to the present disclosure generally comprise at least one nicotine component that is a nicotine-polymer complex. Such complexes, in certain embodiments, comprise a polymeric resin (e.g., a polymeric ion-exchange resin, e.g., a polymeric cation exchange resin) to which nicotine is bound. One example of such a resin is a polymethacrilic acid, such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 3,901,248 to Lichtneckert et al., which is incorporated herein by reference. Another example is a nicotine-polyacrylic carbomer complex, such as Carbopol 974P. In some embodiments, nicotine may be present in the form of a nicotine polyacrylic complex. One example of a suitable nicotine-polymer complex is nicotine polacrilex, which comprises nicotine bound to a resin prepared from methacrylic acid and divinyl benzene. Nicotine polacrilex is available in varying nicotine percentages, e.g., 18% to 20% nicotine; although not limited thereto, nicotine polacrilex generally comprises not less than 95% of the labeled amount of nicotine, calculated on an anhydrous basis. In some embodiments, inclusion of a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex can lead to improved shelf-life stability and better/slower release of the nicotine from the composition/product. In some embodiments, inclusion of a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex can lead to less burn in the oral cavity during use. The amount of nicotine provided by the nicotine-polymer complex can vary from about 5%, about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, or about 60% to about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100%, based on the total weight of nicotine provided from all nicotine components within a given composition. Certain, non-limiting example amounts of nicotine-polymer complex (including resin and nicotine) incorporated within a given composition can range, e.g., from about 0.5% by weight to about 15% by weight, e.g., about 1% by weight to about 10% by weight, e.g., about 2% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of a composition/mixture to be included within a pouched product.
- In some embodiments, the particle size of the nicotine-polymer complex can be intentionally selected. For example, in some embodiments, it may be desirable to provide compositions and products with a nicotine-polymer complex having a specified average particle size and/or a specified particle size distribution. The values provided below as example embodiments of nicotine-polymer complex particle sizes and distributions are based on sieving and/or light scattering measurements as generally known in the art for particle size evaluation. For example, size distribution measurements can be conducted based on mesh size, using, e.g., a RO-TAP® sieve shaker, as described at hub.wstyler.com/rotap-guide (last accessed Aug. 22, 2022), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- In various embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex within the disclosed compositions and products has an average particle size of at least about 1 micrometer, at least about 5 micrometers, at least about 10 micrometers, at least about 25 micrometers, at least about 50 micrometers, at least about 100 micrometers, at least about 150 micrometers, at least about 200 micrometers, at least about 250 micrometers, at least about 300 micrometers, at least about 350 micrometers, at least about 400 micrometers, or at least about 450 micrometers. In various embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex within the disclosed compositions and products has an average particle size of less than about 800 micrometers, less than about 750 micrometers, less than about 700 micrometers, less than about 650 micrometers, less than about 600 micrometers, less than about 550 micrometers, less than about 500 micrometers, less than about 450 micrometers, less than about 400 micrometers, less than about 350 micrometers, less than about 300 micrometers, less than about 250 micrometers, less than about 200 micrometers, less than about 150 micrometers, less than about 100 micrometers, less than about 50 micrometers, or less than about 25 micrometers.
- In some embodiments, the average particle size is about 25 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 50 microns to about 500 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 250 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, or about 200 microns to about 250 microns.
- In some embodiments, a minimum particle size is about 0.1 micron or greater, such as about 0.2 micron or greater. In some embodiments, any particles with sizes smaller than about 5 microns are present in a volume percentage of less than 1%, less than 0.5%, less than 0.25%, or less than 0.1%, based on the total volume of nicotine-polymer complex particles. In some embodiments, a maximum particle size is about 5000 micrometers or lower. In some embodiments, any particles with sizes larger than 1000 microns are present in a volume percentage of less than 1.2%, less than 1.1%, or less than 1%.
- In certain embodiments, the particle sizes of the nicotine-polymer complex particles exhibit a multimodal, e.g., bimodal distribution. In some embodiments, the particles exhibit a first mode with a peak of about 75 to 125 micrometers, e.g., about 80 to about 110 microns and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to 1000 micrometers, e.g., about 700 to about 1000 micrometers. In preferred embodiments, the first mode is the primary mode.
- In some embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex particles are employed as uncoated particles (consisting essentially of the nicotine-polymer complex). In other embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex particles are partially or wholly coated/encapsulated with one or more coatings and/or outer shells. For example, in certain embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex particles are encapsulated with one or more polyols and one or more pH adjusters. In one particular embodiment, nicotine-polymer complex particles are provided which are coated or encapsulated with a combination of mannitol and sodium carbonate. Certain such encapsulated nicotine-polymer complex particles may have an average particle size of from about 350 microns to about 500 microns.
- The nicotine-polymer complex can be used alone or in combination with one or more additional nicotine components. In some embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex is the sole nicotine source in a given composition or product. In some embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex is one of two (or more) nicotine sources in a given composition or product. In certain such embodiments, the nicotine-polymer complex is referred to as a “first nicotine component,” and the composition/product further comprises one or more additional nicotine components (e.g., a “second nicotine component”), which are different from the first nicotine component.
- In some embodiments, a second (and/or third, fourth, fifth, etc., where applicable) nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of unbound nicotine, in the form of nicotine free base or a nicotine salt. By “unbound nicotine” is meant that the nicotine is not intentionally added to the composition in the form of nicotine bound within a resin. The nicotine free base or nicotine salt can be employed alone, i.e., in the form of an extract or other purified material. In some embodiments, the nicotine free base or nicotine salt can be adsorbed in for example, a microcrystalline cellulose material to form a microcrystalline cellulose-nicotine carrier complex.
- This second nicotine component, for example, can be nicotine is in its free base form. See, for example, the discussion of nicotine in free base form in US Pat. Pub. No. 2004/0191322 to Hansson, which is incorporated herein by reference. The second nicotine component can alternatively be, for example, nicotine in the form of a salt, e.g., a salt with one or more organic acids. Salts of nicotine can be provided using the types of ingredients and techniques set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 2,033,909 to Cox et al. and Perfetti, Beitrage Tabakforschung Int., 12: 43-54 (1983), which are incorporated herein by reference. Additionally, salts of nicotine are available from sources such as Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc. and K&K Laboratories, Division of ICN Biochemicals, Inc. Further salts of nicotine are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,738,622; 9,738,622; 9,896,429; 10,464,917; 10,508,096; 10,556,880; 10,865,192; and 11,136,305, all to RJ Reynolds, which are all incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Although the second nicotine component is described herein as optionally being in the form of a nicotine salt, it is noted that this designation is also intended to cover nicotine co-crystals and salt-co-crystal complexes, which may vary in the interaction between the nicotine and its coformer, e.g., as described in the patents to RJ Reynolds referenced herein above. As such, “nicotine salt” as used herein encompasses forms of nicotine and at least one other coformer, wherein both nicotine and coformer are in ionic form (nicotine salt); forms of nicotine and at least one other coformer, wherein both nicotine and coformer are in neutral form (nicotine co-crystal); and hybrid bonding structures with both salt and co-crystal characteristics (nicotine salt-co-crystals), unless the context dictates otherwise.
- The second nicotine component is, in some embodiments, selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base, a nicotine salt such as hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, monotartrate, bitartrate, sulfate, salicylate, and nicotine zinc chloride. In certain embodiments, the second nicotine component is a purified nicotine extract from tobacco. In certain embodiments, the second nicotine component is pharmaceutical grade (e.g., USP) nicotine. The second nicotine component can, in some embodiments, be incorporated within a composition/product in the form of an aqueous solution and the concentration of nicotine contained therein can vary; in some embodiments, a solution with a concentration of nicotine of about 7% to about 25% by weight can be used. Calculations of the required amount of solution to be added will require consideration of the concentration and the desired content of the second nicotine component within the final composition/product.
- The amount of the second nicotine component, where included, can vary and may depend, in part, on the exact form of the second nicotine component (e.g., nicotine free base or nicotine salt). In some embodiments, the amount of nicotine provided by the second nicotine component where included can vary from 0%, about 5%, about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, or about 60% to about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95%, or about 98%, based on the total weight of all nicotine components within a given composition. Certain, non-limiting example amounts of the second nicotine component incorporated within a given composition can range, e.g., from about 0.01% by weight to about 10% by weight, e.g., about 0.1 to about 1.5% by weight, about 0.5% by weight to about 5% by weight, about 1% to about 5% by weight, or about 0.5% to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of a mixture to be included within a pouched product.
- The ratio of the first nicotine component to the second nicotine component (where present) in the compositions and products provided herein can vary. In some embodiments, the compositions and products comprise nicotine wholly or primarily in the form of the first nicotine component; in some embodiments, the compositions and products comprise nicotine primarily in the form of the second nicotine component. In some embodiments, the first and second nicotine components are provided in roughly equivalent amounts by weight. Certain examples include, but are not limited to, compositions wherein 100% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex, compositions wherein 50% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and 50% of the nicotine is in the form of nicotine free base or salt; and compositions wherein 80% of the nicotine is in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and 20% of the nicotine is in the form of nicotine free base or salt, as well as all ranges there between.
- The total amount of nicotine provided by the nicotine component(s) provided herein can also vary. In some embodiments, a pouch is provided including a composition which comprises about 5 mg to about 25 mg nicotine, e.g., about 5 mg nicotine to about 20 mg nicotine, and about 10 mg nicotine to about 15 mg nicotine. Certain, non-limiting examples of pouch compositions comprise about 5 mg nicotine per pouch, about 10 mg nicotine per pouch, about 15 mg nicotine per pouch, or about 20 mg nicotine per pouch. Certain specific embodiments comprise about 2 to about 4% nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component; about 3 to about 5% nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component; and about 8 to about 10% of the nicotine-polymer complex and about 1 to about 3% of the second nicotine component, all on a weight basis based on the entirety of the composition, e.g., as included within a pouched product.
- In some embodiments, at least a portion of the one or more of the nicotine components in the compositions and products provided herein are associated, by ion pairing, with one or more organic acids. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the basic amine is associated with at least a portion of the organic acid or the alkali metal salt thereof. Depending on multiple variables (concentration, pH, nature of the organic acid, and the like), the nicotine component(s) present in the composition can exist in multiple forms, including ion paired, in solution (i.e., fully solvated), as the free base, as a cation, as a salt, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the association between the nicotine and at least a portion of the organic acid or an alkali metal salt or alkaline earth metal salt thereof, is in the form of an ion pair between the basic amine and a conjugate base of the organic acid.
- Ion pairing describes the partial association of oppositely charged ions in relatively concentrated solutions to form distinct chemical species called ion pairs. The strength of the association (i.e., the ion pairing) depends on the electrostatic force of attraction between the positive and negative ions (i.e., protonated basic amine and the conjugate base of the organic acid). By “conjugate base” is meant the base resulting from deprotonation of the corresponding acid (e.g., benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid). On average, a certain population of these ion pairs exists at any given time, although the formation and dissociation of ion pairs is continuous. In the composition as disclosed herein, and/or upon oral use of said composition (e.g., upon contact with saliva), the nicotine and the conjugate base of the organic acid exist at least partially in the form of an ion pair. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that such ion pairing may minimize chemical degradation of the nicotine and/or enhance the oral availability of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine). Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that such ion pairing may also enhance release of nicotine from oral compositions as disclosed herein when nicotine is present in a resin-bound form.
- One of skill in the art will recognize that the extent of ion pairing in the disclosed compositions, both before and during use by the consumer, may vary based on, for example, pH, the nature of the organic acid, the concentration of basic amine (e.g., nicotine), the concentration of the organic acid or conjugate base of the organic acid present in the composition, the moisture content of the composition, the ionic strength of the composition, and the like. One of skill in the art will also recognize that ion pairing is an equilibrium process influenced by the foregoing variables. Accordingly, quantification of the extent of ion pairing is difficult or impossible by calculation or direct observation. However, the presence of ion pairing may be demonstrated through surrogate measures such as partitioning between octanol and water or membrane permeation of aqueous solutions of e.g., nicotine plus organic acids and/or their conjugate bases. Particularly, an octanol-water partitioning favoring distribution of a basic amine-organic acid ion pair into octanol is predictive of good absorption of the basic amine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
- As described herein above, in some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid. As used herein, the term “organic acid” refers to an organic (i.e., carbon-based) compound that is characterized by acidic properties. Typically, organic acids are relatively weak acids (i.e., they do not dissociate completely in the presence of water), such as carboxylic acids (—CO2H) or sulfonic acids (—SO2OH). As used herein, reference to organic acid means an organic acid that is intentionally added. In this regard, an organic acid may be intentionally added as a specific composition ingredient as opposed to merely being inherently present as a component of another composition ingredient (e.g., the small amount of organic acid which may inherently be present in a composition ingredient, such as a tobacco material).
- Suitable organic acids will typically have a range of lipophilicities (i.e., a polarity giving an appropriate balance of water and organic solubility). Lipophilicity is conveniently measured in terms of logP, the partition coefficient of a molecule between a lipophilic phase and an aqueous phase (usually water). Typically, the lipophilic phase is octanol, although other lipophilic solvents may also be used. For avoidance of doubt, reference in the present disclosure to logP means the partition coefficient between octanol and water. Similarly, reference to a logD value herein means a logD obtained by partition between octanol and water (buffered to be at a specific pH value). A logP (or logD) favoring distribution of a nicotine-organic acid ion pair into the lipophilic phase (a positive logP or logD) is predictive of good absorption of the nicotine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
- Typically, lipophilicities of suitable organic acids, as indicated by logP, will vary between about 1 and about 12 (more soluble in octanol than in water). In some embodiments, the organic acid has a logP value from about 1 to about 12, e.g., from about 1.0. about 1.5, about 2.0, about 2.5, about 3.0, about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, about 5.0, about 5.5, about 6.0, about 6.5, about 7.0, about 7.5, or about 8.0, to about 8.5, about 9.0, about 9.5, about 10.0, about 10.5, about 11.0, about 11.5, or about 12.0.
- Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that moderately lipophilic organic acids (e.g., logP of from about 1.4 to about 4.5) produce ion pairs with nicotine which are of a polarity providing good octanol-water partitioning of the ion pair, and hence partitioning of nicotine, into octanol versus water. As discussed above, such partitioning into octanol is predictive of favorable oral availability.
- In specific embodiments, the organic acid has a logP value from about 3.0 to about 8.0, about 10.0, or even 12.0. In some embodiments, the presence of certain solvents or solubilizing agents (e.g., inclusion in the composition of glycerin or propylene glycol) may be beneficial in solubilizing organic acids and the corresponding salts or ion pairs thereof with the basic amine for highly lipophilic organic acids (e.g., higher than about 4.5).
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid. The carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid functional group may be attached to any alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group having, for example, from one to twenty carbon atoms (C1-C20). In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl carboxylic or sulfonic acid.
- As used herein, “alkyl” refers to any straight chain or branched chain hydrocarbon. The alkyl group may be saturated (i.e., having all spa carbon atoms), or may be unsaturated (i.e., having at least one site of unsaturation). As used herein, the term “unsaturated” refers to the presence of a carbon-carbon, sp2 double bond in one or more positions within the alkyl group. Unsaturated alkyl groups may be mono- or polyunsaturated. Representative straight chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, and n-hexyl. Branched chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, and 2-methylbutyl. Representative unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, and the like. An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- “Cycloalkyl” as used herein refers to a carbocyclic group, which may be mono- or bicyclic. Cycloalkyl groups include rings having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle or 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle. Examples of monocyclic cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted, and may include one or more sites of unsaturation (e.g., cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl).
- The term “aryl” as used herein refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group. Examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl and naphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- “Heteroaryl” and “heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refer to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system, respectively, in which one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group comprises up to 20 carbon atoms and from 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S. A heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (for example, 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (for example, 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S), for example: a bicyclo[4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system. Examples of heteroaryl groups include by way of example and not limitation, pyridyl, thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, phenoxazinyl, isochromanyl, chromanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, and isatinoyl. Examples of heterocycloalkyls include by way of example and not limitation, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, bis-tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, piperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and morpholinyl. Heteroaryl and heterocycloalkyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted.
- “Substituted” as used herein and as applied to any of the above alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, means that one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a substituent. Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, —Cl, Br, F, alkyl, —OH, —OCH3, NH2, —NHCH3, —N(CH3)2, —CN, —NC(═O)CH3, —C(═O)—, —C(═O)NH2, and —C(═O)N(CH3)2. Wherever a group is described as “optionally substituted,” that group can be substituted with one or more of the above substituents, independently selected for each occasion. In some embodiments, the substituent may be one or more methyl groups or one or more hydroxyl groups.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl carboxylic acid. Non-limiting examples of alkyl carboxylic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, heptanoic acid, octanoic acid, nonanoic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, dodecanoic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, and the like. In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl sulfonic acid. Non-limiting examples of alkyl sulfonic acids include propanesulfonic acid, heptanesulfonic acid, and octanesulfonic acid. In some embodiments, the alkyl carboxylic or sulfonic acid is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups. Non-limiting examples include glycolic acid, 4-hydroxybutyric acid, and lactic acid. In some embodiments, an organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group or more than one sulfonic acid group (e.g., two, three, or more carboxylic acid groups). Non-limiting examples include oxalic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, and glutaric acid. In organic acids containing multiple carboxylic acids (e.g., from two to four carboxylic acid groups), one or more of the carboxylic acid groups may be esterified. Non-limiting examples include succinic acid monoethyl ester, monomethyl fumarate, monomethyl or dimethyl citrate, and the like.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group and one or more hydroxyl groups. Non-limiting examples of such acids include tartaric acid, citric acid, and the like. In some embodiments, the organic acid is an aryl carboxylic acid or an aryl sulfonic acid. Non-limiting examples of aryl carboxylic and sulfonic acids include benzoic acid, toluic acids, salicylic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.
- Further non-limiting examples of organic acids which may be useful in certain embodiments include 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid (L), aspartic acid (L), alpha-methylbutyric acid, camphoric acid (+), camphor-10-sulfonic acid (+), cinnamic acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane-1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, furoic acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, glucoheptonic acid, gluconic acid, glucuronic acid, glutamic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, isobutyric acid, isovaleric acid, lactobionic acid, lauric acid, levulinic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, oleic acid, palmitic acid, pamoic acid, phenylacetic acid, pyroglutamic acid, pyruvic acid, sebacic acid, stearic acid, and undecylenic acid.
- Examples of suitable acids include, but are not limited to, the list of organic acids in Table 1
-
TABLE 1 Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids Acid Name logP benzoic acid 1.9 phenylacetic 1.4 p-toluic acid 2.3 ethyl benzoic acid 2.9 isopropyl benzoic acid 3.5 4-phenylbutyric 2.4 2-napthoxyacetic acid 2.5 napthylacetic acid 2.7 heptanoic acid 2.5 octanoic acid 3.05 nonanoic acid 3.5 decanoic acid 4.09 9-deceneoic acid 3.3 2-deceneoic acid 3.8 10-undecenoic acid 3.9 dodecandioic acid 3.2 dodecanoic acid 4.6 myristic acid 5.3 palmitic acid 6.4 stearic acid 7.6 cyclohexanebutanoic acid 3.4 1-heptanesulfonic acid 2.0 1-octanesulfonic acid 2.5 1-nonanesulfonic acid 3.1 monooctyl succinate 2.8 tocopherol succinate 10.2 monomenthyl succinate 3 monomenthyl glutarate 3.4 norbixin 7.2 ((2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16E,18E)- 4,8,13,17-tetramethylicosa- 2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid) bixin 7.5 ((2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16Z,18E)- 20-methoxy-4,8,13,17-tetramethyl-20- oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18- nonaenoic acid) - In some embodiments, the organic acid is a mono ester of a di- or poly-acid, such as mono-octyl succinate, mono-octyl fumarate, or the like. For example, in some embodiments, the organic acid is a mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid or a poly-carboxylic acid. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, the alcohol forming the mono ester of the dicarboxylic acid is a lipophilic alcohol. Examples of suitable lipophilic alcohols include, but are not limited to, octanol, menthol, and tocopherol. In some embodiments, the organic acid is an octyl mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid, such as monooctyl succinate, monooctyl fumarate, or the like. In some embodiments, the organic acid is a monomenthyl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain menthyl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the cooling sensation they may provide upon use of the product comprising the composition. In some embodiments, the organic acid is monomenthyl succinate, monomenthyl fumarate, monomenthyl glutarate, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the organic acid is a monotocopheryl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain tocopheryl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the antioxidant effects they may provide. In some embodiments, the organic acid is tocopheryl succinate, tocopheryl fumarate, tocopheryl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids. Carotenoids are tetraterpenes, meaning that they are produced from 8 isoprene molecules and contain 40 carbon atoms. Accordingly, they are usually lipophilic due to the presence of long unsaturated aliphatic chains, and are generally yellow, orange, or red in color. Certain carotenoid derivatives can be advantageous in oral compositions by virtue of providing both ion pairing and serving as a colorant in the composition. In some embodiments, the organic acid is 2E,4E, 6E, 8E, 10E,12E,14E,16Z,18E)-20-methoxy-4, 8,13,17-tetramethyl-20-oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenoic acid (bixin) or an isomer thereof. Bixin is an apocarotenoid found in annatto seeds from the achiote tree (Bixa orellana), and is the naturally occurring pigment providing the reddish orange color to annatto. Bixin is soluble in fats and alcohols but insoluble in water, and is chemically unstable when isolated, converting via isomerization into the double bond isomer, trans-bixin (β-bixin), having the structure:
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is (2E,4E, 6E, 8E, 10E, 12E, 14E, 16E, 18E)-4,8,13,17-tetramethylicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid (norbixin), a water soluble hydrolysis product of bixin having the structure:
- The selection of organic acid may further depend on additional properties in addition to or without consideration to the logP value. For example, an organic acid should be one recognized as safe for human consumption, and which has acceptable flavor, odor, volatility, stability, and the like. Determination of appropriate organic acids is within the purview of one of skill in the art.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, or octanoic acid. In some embodiments, the organic acid is benzoic acid, octanoic acid, or decanoic acid. In some embodiments, the organic acid is octanoic acid. In some embodiments, the organic acid is benzoic acid.
- In some embodiments, more than one organic acid may be present. For example, the composition may comprise two, or three, or four, or more organic acids. Accordingly, reference herein to “an organic acid” contemplates mixtures of two or more organic acids. The relative amounts of the multiple organic acids may vary. For example, a composition may comprise equal amounts of two, or three, or more organic acids, or may comprise different relative amounts. In this manner, it is possible to include certain organic acids (e.g., citric acid or myristic acid) which have a logP value outside the desired range, when combined with other organic acids to provide the desired average logP range for the combination. In some embodiments, it may be desirable to include organic acids in the composition which have logP values outside the desired range for purposes such as, but not limited to, providing desirable organoleptic properties, stability, as flavor components, and the like. Further, certain lipophilic organic acids have undesirable flavor and or aroma characteristics which would preclude their presence as the sole organic acid (e.g., in equimolar or greater quantities relative to nicotine). Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that a combination of different organic acids may provide desirable ion pairing while the concentration of any single organic acid in the composition remains below the threshold which would be found objectionable from a sensory perspective. For example, in some embodiments, the organic acid may comprise from about 1 to about 5 or more molar equivalents of benzoic acid relative to the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), combined with e.g., about 0.2 molar equivalents of octanoic acid or a salt thereof, and 0.2 molar equivalents of decanoic acid or a salt thereof.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is a combination of any two organic acids selected from the group consisting of benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, and octanoic acid. In some embodiments, the organic acid is a combination of benzoic acid, octanoic acid, and decanoic acid, or benzoic and octanoic acid. In some embodiments, the composition comprises citric acid in addition to one or more of benzoic acid, a toluic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, decanoic acid, and octanoic acid.
- In some embodiments, the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid or an alkaline earth metal salt of an organic acid. For example, at least a portion of the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt or an alkaline earth metal salt. Suitable alkali metals include lithium, sodium, and potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium or potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium. In some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid.
- In some embodiments, the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid or an alkaline earth metal salt of an organic acid. For example, at least a portion of the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt or an alkaline earth metal salt. Suitable alkali metals include lithium, sodium, and potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium or potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium. In some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid. Suitable alkaline earth metals include, but are not limited to, magnesium and calcium. In some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid and a calcium salt of the organic acid. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that multivalent cations such as calcium or magnesium ions, provided by a calcium or magnesium salt, respectively, of an organic acid, or alternatively or in addition by an inorganic calcium or magnesium salt, described further herein below, may increase the ionic strength of the composition. Again without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that increased ionic strength of the composition, such as provided by the presence of a salt, such as the calcium salt of an organic acid, may enhance one or more of: the extent of ion pairing of a basic amine-containing active ingredient, such as nicotine, with the conjugate base of the organic acid; a desirable composition pH (e.g., around 6); and enhanced release of nicotine when nicotine is present in resin bound form (e.g., nicotine polacrilex). Surprisingly, according to the present disclosure, it has been found that release of nicotine from nicotine polacrilex is enhanced by the presence of certain calcium salts. Specifically, with reference to Examples 13 and 16 and
FIGS. 4 and 5 , compositions comprising nicotine polacrilex and certain calcium salts achieved greater release of nicotine from nicotine polacrilex than achieved in the absence of such salts. - Suitable calcium salts of organic acids include, but are not limited to, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and combinations thereof. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that in some embodiments, the presence of one or more calcium salts of an organic acid may be preferred relative to inorganic calcium salts (e.g., calcium chloride or magnesium chloride) or alkali metal salts (e.g., sodium chloride or potassium chloride) due to a reduced sensory perception of “saltiness” in oral products comprising such salts.
- Certain such calcium salts (e.g., including, but not limited to, calcium glycerol phosphate and calcium lactate gluconate) are particularly advantageous, e.g., as they are food grade additives with neutral taste. In some embodiments, inclusion of such calcium salts advantageously provides enhanced properties, e.g., as shown in Example 5/
FIG. 4 , such as enhanced nicotine release, as well as logD, great low pH. - In some embodiments, the composition comprises benzoic acid and sodium benzoate, octanoic acid and sodium octanoate, decanoic acid and sodium decanoate, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises benzoic acid and sodium benzoate. In some embodiments, the composition comprises sodium benzoate. In some embodiments, the composition comprises calcium benzoate. In some embodiments, the composition comprises a mixture of sodium benzoate and calcium benzoate. In some embodiments, the composition comprises calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, or a combination thereof, either alone or in combination with a sodium salt of an organic acid, such as sodium benzoate.
- In some embodiments, the ratio of the organic acid to the salt of the organic acid (e.g., a sodium and/or calcium salt) is from about 0.1 to about 10, such as from about 0.1, about 0.25, about 0.3, about 0.5, about 0.75, or about 1, to about 2, about 5, or about 10. For example, in some embodiments, both an organic acid and the salt thereof are added to the other components of the composition, wherein the organic acid is added in excess of the salt, in equimolar quantities with the salt, or as a fraction of the salt (e.g., sodium salt). One of skill in the art will recognize that the relative amounts will be determined by the desired pH of the composition, as well as the desired ionic strength. For example, the organic acid may be added in a quantity to provide a desired pH level of the composition, while the alkali metal (e.g., sodium) salt is added in a quantity to provide the desired extent of ion pairing. As one of skill in the art will understand, the quantity of organic acid (i.e., the protonated form) present in the composition, relative to the alkali metal salt or conjugate base form present in the composition, will vary according to the pH of the composition and the pKa of the organic acid, as well as according to the actual relative quantities initially added to the composition.
- The amount of organic acid or salt thereof present in the composition, relative to the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), may vary. Generally, as the concentration of the organic acid (or the conjugate base thereof) increases, the percent of basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) that is ion paired with the organic acid increases. This typically increases the partitioning of the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), in the form of an ion pair, into octanol versus water as measured by the logP (the log10 of the partitioning coefficient). In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05, about 0.1, about 1, about 1.5, about 2, or about 5, to about 10, about 15, or about 20 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine), calculated as the free base amine-containing active ingredient.
- In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 1 to about 10, or from about 2 to about 5 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof, to nicotine, on a free-base nicotine basis. In some embodiments, the organic acid, the salt thereof, or the combination thereof, is present in a molar ratio with the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) from about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5, to about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, or about 10. In embodiments wherein more than one organic acid, salt thereof, or both, are present, it is to be understood that such molar ratios reflect the totality of the organic acids present.
- In certain embodiments the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 3.0 to about 9.5, such as from about 3.0 to about 9.0, or from about 3.0 to about 8.5, or from about 3.0 to about 8.0, or from about 3.5 to about 7.5, or from about 4.5 to about 7.0, or from about 5.5 to about 7.0, or from about 4.0 to about 5.5, or from about 6.0 to about 9.0, or from about 7.0 to about 9.5. In some embodiments, the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of about 3.0, about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, about 5.0, about 5.5, about 6.0, about 6.5, about 7.0, about 7.5, about 8.0, about 8.5, or about 9.0. In some embodiments, the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 4.5, about 5.0, or about 5.5, to about 6.0, or about 6.5. In some embodiments, the organic acid is provided in a quantity sufficient to provide a pH of the composition of from about 5.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0, to about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, or about 6.5. In other embodiments, a mineral acid (e.g., hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, or the like) is added to adjust the pH of the composition to the desired value. Notably, at alkaline pH values (e.g., such as from about 7.5 to about 9), nicotine is largely present in the free base form (and accordingly, exhibits high partitioning into octanol), while, at acidic pH values (such as from about 6.5 to about 4), nicotine is largely present in a protonated form (and accordingly, exhibits lower partitioning into octanol). In some embodiments, a buffer, such as carbonate or bicarbonate, are added to adjust and/or maintain the desired pH value. Other suitable buffers are described further herein below.
- In some embodiments, the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the organic acid and the basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such. In other embodiments, the organic acid and basic amine-containing active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
- In some embodiments, the composition further comprises a solubility enhancer to increase the solubility of one or more of the organic acid or salt thereof. Suitable solubility enhancers include, but are not limited to, humectants as described herein such as glycerin or propylene glycol.
- The material within the pouches as described herein typically includes at least one particulate filler component. Such particulate filler components may fulfill multiple functions, such as enhancing certain organoleptic properties such as texture and mouthfeel, enhancing cohesiveness or compressibility of the product, and the like. Generally, the filler components are particulate materials and are cellulose-based. For example, suitable particulate filler components are any non-tobacco plant material or derivative thereof, including cellulose materials derived from such sources. Examples of cellulosic non-tobacco plant material include cereal grains (e.g., maize, oat, barley, rye, buckwheat, and the like), sugar beet (e.g., FIBREX® brand filler available from International Fiber Corporation), bran fiber, and mixtures thereof. Non-limiting examples of derivatives of non-tobacco plant material include starches (e.g., from potato, wheat, rice, corn), natural cellulose, and modified cellulosic materials. Additional examples of potential particulate filler components include maltodextrin, dextrose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, lactose, mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol. Combinations of fillers can also be used.
- “Starch” as used herein may refer to pure starch from any source, modified starch, or starch derivatives. Starch is present, typically in granular form, in almost all green plants and in various types of plant tissues and organs (e.g., seeds, leaves, rhizomes, roots, tubers, shoots, fruits, grains, and stems). Starch can vary in composition, as well as in granular shape and size. Often, starch from different sources has different chemical and physical characteristics. A specific starch can be selected for inclusion in the mixture based on the ability of the starch material to impart a specific organoleptic property to composition. Starches derived from various sources can be used. For example, major sources of starch include cereal grains (e.g., rice, wheat, and maize) and root vegetables (e.g., potatoes and cassava). Other examples of sources of starch include acorns, arrowroot, arracacha, bananas, barley, beans (e.g., favas, lentils, mung beans, peas, chickpeas), breadfruit, buckwheat, canna, chestnuts, colacasia, katakuri, kudzu, malanga, millet, oats, oca, Polynesian arrowroot, sago, sorghum, sweet potato, quinoa, rye, tapioca, taro, tobacco, water chestnuts, and yams. Certain starches are modified starches. A modified starch has undergone one or more structural modifications, often designed to alter its high heat properties. Some starches have been developed by genetic modifications, and are considered to be “genetically modified” starches. Other starches are obtained and subsequently physically (e.g., heat, cool water swelling, etc.), chemically, or enzymatically modified. For example, modified starches can be starches that have been subjected to chemical reactions, such as esterification, etherification, oxidation, depolymerization (thinning) by acid catalysis or oxidation in the presence of base, bleaching, transglycosylation and depolymerization (e.g., dextrinization in the presence of a catalyst), cross-linking, acetylation, hydroxypropylation, and/or partial hydrolysis. Enzymatic treatment includes subjecting native starches to enzyme isolates or concentrates, microbial enzymes, and/or enzymes native to plant materials, e.g., amylase present in corn kernels to modify corn starch. Other starches are modified by heat treatments, such as pregelatinization, dextrinization, and/or cold water swelling processes. Certain modified starches include monostarch phosphate, distarch glycerol, distarch phosphate esterified with sodium trimetaphosphate, phosphate distarch phosphate, acetylated distarch phosphate, starch acetate esterified with acetic anhydride, starch acetate esterified with vinyl acetate, acetylated distarch adipate, acetylated distarch glycerol, hydroxypropyl starch, hydroxypropyl distarch glycerol, starch sodium octenyl succinate.
- In some embodiments, the particulate filler component is a cellulose material or cellulose derivative. One particularly suitable particulate filler component for use in the products described herein is microcrystalline cellulose (“MCC”). The MCC may be synthetic or semi-synthetic, or it may be obtained entirely from natural celluloses. The MCC may be selected from the group consisting of AVICEL® grades PH-100, PH-102, PH-103, PH-105, PH-112, PH-113, PH-200, PH-300, PH-302,
VIVACEL® grades 101, 102, 12, 20 and EMOCEL® grades 50M and 90M, and the like, and mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the mixture comprises MCC as the particulate filler component. The quantity of MCC present in the mixture as described herein may vary according to the desired properties. - The amount of particulate filler component can vary, but is typically up to about 75 percent of the material contained within the pouch by weight (i.e., the mixture), based on the total weight of the mixture. A typical range of particulate filler material (e.g., MCC) within the mixture can be from about 10 to about 75 percent by total weight of the mixture, for example, from about 10, about 15, about 20, about 25, or about 30, to about 35, about 40, about 45, or about 50 weight percent (e.g., about 20 to about 50 weight percent, about 25 to about 45 weight percent, or about 50 to about 80 weight percent or about 60 to about 80 weight percent). In certain embodiments, the amount of particulate filler material is at least about 10 percent by weight, such as at least about 20 percent, or at least about 25 percent, or at least about 30 percent, or at least about 35 percent, or at least about 40 percent, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- In one embodiment, the particulate filler component further comprises a cellulose derivative or a combination of such derivatives. In some embodiments, the mixture comprises from about 1 to about 10% of the cellulose derivative by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture, with certain embodiments comprising about 1 to about 5% by weight of cellulose derivative. In certain embodiments, the cellulose derivative is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers), meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group. Non-limiting examples of such cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose (“HPC”), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (“HPMC”), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose (“CMC”). In one embodiment, the cellulose derivative is one or more of methylcellulose, HPC, HPMC, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and CMC. In one embodiment, the cellulose derivative is HPC. In some embodiments, the mixture comprises from about 0% to about 5% HPC by weight, e.g., about 1% to about 3% HPC by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- In some further embodiments, the composition comprises, as a filler, a byproduct of a pulping process, such as citrus rinds. In some embodiments, the composition comprises, as a filler, wheat straw. Such fillers can be used in combination with any of the types of particulate fillers referenced herein above.
- The water content of the mixture within the pouched product described herein, prior to use by a consumer of the product, may vary according to the desired properties. Typically, the mixture, as present within the product prior to insertion into the mouth of the user, is less than about 60 percent by weight of water, and generally is from about 1 to about 60% by weight of water, for example, from about 5 to about 55, about 10 to about 50, about 20 to about 45, or about 25 to about 40 percent water by weight, including water amounts of at least about 5% by weight, at least about 10% by weight, at least about 15% by weight, and at least about 20% by weight.
- In some embodiments, the mixture comprises a lower water content than some conventional mixtures for inclusion within a pouched product. For example, in some embodiments, the mixture comprises water in an amount of up to about 25% by weight or up to about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture. In some embodiments, the water content of the particulate composition is about 1% to about 12% by weight, such as less than about 8%, less than about 7%, less than about 6%, less than about 5%, or less than about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the particulate composition. Example embodiments can include water in an amount of about 15% to about 25%, e.g., about 17% to about 20%.
- As used herein, a “flavoring agent” or “flavorant” is any flavorful or aromatic substance capable of altering the sensory characteristics associated with the oral product. Examples of sensory characteristics that can be modified by the flavoring agent include taste, mouthfeel, moistness, coolness/heat, and/or fragrance/aroma. Flavoring agents may be natural or synthetic, and the character of the flavors imparted thereby may be described, without limitation, as fresh, sweet, herbal, confectionary, floral, fruity, or spicy. Specific types of flavors include, but are not limited to, vanilla, coffee, chocolate/cocoa, cream, mint, spearmint, menthol, peppermint, wintergreen, eucalyptus, lavender, cardamon, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, cascarilla, sandalwood, honey, jasmine, ginger, anise, sage, licorice, lemon, orange, apple, peach, lime, cherry, strawberry, trigeminal sensates, melatonin, terpenes, and any combinations thereof. See also, Leffingwell et al., Tobacco Flavoring for Smoking Products, R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company (1972), which is incorporated herein by reference. Flavorings also may include components that are considered moistening, cooling or smoothening agents, such as eucalyptus. These flavors may be provided neat (i.e., alone) or in a composite, and may be employed as concentrates or flavor packages (e.g., spearmint and menthol, orange and cinnamon; lime, pineapple, and the like). Representative types of components also are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 5,387,416 to White et al.; US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2005/0244521 to Strickland et al.; and PCT Application Pub. No. WO 05/041699 to Quinter et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In some instances, the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form.
- The flavoring agent generally comprises at least one volatile flavor component. As used herein, “volatile” refers to a chemical substance that forms a vapor readily at ambient temperatures (i.e., a chemical substance that has a high vapor pressure at a given temperature relative to a nonvolatile substance). Typically, a volatile flavor component has a molecular weight below about 400 Da, and often include at least one carbon-carbon double bond, carbon-oxygen double bond, or both. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof. Non-limiting examples of aldehydes include vanillin, ethyl vanillin, p-anisaldehyde, hexanal, furfural, isovaleraldehyde, cuminaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and citronellal. Non-limiting examples of ketones include 1-hydroxy-2-propanone and 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-cyclopentenone-1-one. Non-limiting examples of esters include allyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, ethyl hexanoate, isoamyl acetate, and 3-methylbutyl acetate. Non-limiting examples of terpenes include sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, nerolidol, thuj one, myrcene, geraniol, nerol, citronellol, linalool, and eucalyptol. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more of ethyl vanillin, cinnamaldehyde, sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, or citral. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises ethyl vanillin.
- The amount of flavoring agent utilized in the mixture can vary, but is typically up to about 10 weight percent, and certain embodiments are characterized by a flavoring agent content of at least about 0.1 weight percent, such as about 0.5 to about 10 weight percent, about 1 to about 6 weight percent, or about 2 to about 5 weight percent, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- The amount of flavoring agent present within the mixture may vary over a period of time (e.g., during a period of storage after preparation of the mixture). For example, certain volatile components present in the mixture may evaporate or undergo chemical transformations, leading to a reduction in the concentration of one or more volatile flavor components. In one embodiment, a concentration of one or more of the at least one volatile flavor components present is greater than a concentration of the same one or more volatile flavor components present in a control pouched product which does not include the one or more organic acids, after the same time period. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the same mechanisms responsible for loss of whiteness result in a gradual decline in certain volatile components in the flavoring (e.g., aldehydes, ketones, terpenes). Therefore, a decline in the presence of these volatile components leading to the discoloration over time may be expected to diminish the sensory satisfaction associated with products subject to such a degradation process.
- In some embodiments, the mixture may further comprise a salt (e.g., alkali metal salts), typically employed in an amount sufficient to provide desired sensory attributes to the mixture. Non-limiting examples of suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, ammonium chloride, flour salt, and the like. When present, a representative amount of salt is about 0.5 percent by weight or more, about 1.0 percent by weight or more, or at about 1.5 percent by weight or more, but will typically make up about 10 percent or less of the total weight of the mixture, or about 7.5 percent or less or about 5 percent or less (e.g., about 0.5 to about 5 percent by weight).
- The mixture typically further comprises one or more sweeteners. The sweeteners can be any sweetener or combination of sweeteners, in natural or artificial form, or as a combination of natural and artificial sweeteners. Examples of natural sweeteners include isomaltulose, fructose, sucrose, glucose, maltose, mannose, galactose, lactose, stevia, honey, and the like. Examples of artificial sweeteners include sucralose, maltodextrin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame K, neotame and the like. In some embodiments, the sweetener comprises one or more sugar alcohols. Sugar alcohols are polyols derived from monosaccharides or disaccharides that have a partially or fully hydrogenated form. Sugar alcohols have, for example, about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms and include erythritol, arabitol, ribitol, isomalt, maltitol, dulcitol, iditol, mannitol, xylitol, lactitol, sorbitol, and combinations thereof (e.g., hydrogenated starch hydrolysates). When present, a representative amount of sweetener may make up from about 0.1 to about 20 percent or more of the of the mixture by weight, for example, from about 0.1 to about 1%, from about 1 to about 5%, from about 5 to about 10%, or from about 10 to about 20% of the mixture on a weight basis, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- A binder (or combination of binders) may be employed in certain embodiments, in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity to the mixture. Binders also often function as thickening or gelling agents. Typical binders can be organic or inorganic, or a combination thereof. Representative binders include modified cellulose, povidone, sodium alginate, starch-based binders, pectin, carrageenan, pullulan, zein, and the like, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the binder comprises pectin or carrageenan or combinations thereof.
- A binder may be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity to the mixture. The amount of binder utilized in the mixture can vary, but is typically up to about 30 weight percent, and certain embodiments are characterized by a binder content of at least about 0.1% by weight, such as about 1 to about 30% by weight, or about 5 to about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- In certain embodiments, the binder includes a gum, for example, a natural gum. As used herein, a natural gum refers to polysaccharide materials of natural origin that have binding properties, and which are also useful as a thickening or gelling agents. Representative natural gums derived from plants, which are typically water soluble to some degree, include xanthan gum, guar gum, gum arabic, ghatti gum, gum tragacanth, karaya gum, locust bean gum, gellan gum, and combinations thereof. When present, natural gum binder materials are typically present in an amount of up to about 5% by weight, for example, from about 0.1, about 0.2, about 0.3, about 0.4, about 0.5, about 0.6, about 0.7, about 0.8, about 0.9, or about 1%, to about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture.
- In certain embodiments, one or more humectants may be employed in the mixture. Examples of humectants include, but are not limited to, glycerin, propylene glycol, and the like. Where included, the humectant is typically provided in an amount sufficient to provide desired moisture attributes to the mixture. Further, in some instances, the humectant may impart desirable flow characteristics to the mixture for depositing in a mold. When present, a humectant will typically make up about 10% or less of the weight of the mixture (e.g., from about 0.5 to about 8% by weight). When present, a representative amount of humectant is about 0.1% to about 1% by weight, about 0.1% to about 0.5% by weight, about 1% to about 5% by weight, about 2% to about 10% by weight, or about 5% to about 10% by weight based on the total weight of the mixture. In some embodiments, a humectant (e.g., glycerol) can improve the flavor release and/or flavor intensity profile of the disclosed products.
- In certain embodiments, the mixture of the present disclosure can comprise pH adjusters or buffering agents. Examples of pH adjusters and buffering agents that can be used include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides (e.g., alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide) and alkaline earth metal hydroxides (e.g., calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide), as well as other alkali metal buffers such as metal carbonates (e.g., potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, or sodium carbonate), or metal bicarbonates such as sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, and the like. Additional, non-limiting examples include ammonia hydroxide, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium benzoate, sodium sesquicarbonate, trisodium phosphate, and combinations thereof. Where present, the buffering agent is typically present in an amount less than about 5 percent based on the weight of the mixture, for example, from about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, or 0.5% to about 5%, such as, e.g., from about 0.75% to about 4%, from about 0.75% to about 3%, or from about 1% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the mixture. Non-limiting examples of suitable buffers include alkali metals acetates, glycinates, phosphates, glycerophosphates, citrates, carbonates, hydrogen carbonates, borates, or mixtures thereof.
- Typically, the nicotine complex present in the disclosed compositions requires the inclusion of a base, in certain embodiments, a relatively strong base to release the nicotine therefrom. For example, in some embodiments a pH adjuster that is a stronger base than a carbonate is included within the composition. Examples of bases that may be sufficient for this purpose include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides such as potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, and sodium hydroxide. It is noted that, in some embodiments, additional buffering agents/pH adjusters may be included in the disclosed compositions (e.g., including, but not limited to, metal carbonates); such additional components can, in some embodiments, serve one or more additional functions within the composition (e.g., modifying the flavor of the composition).
- In some embodiments, the pH of compositions within the scope of the present disclosure is about 6-9, e.g., about 6-7, 6-8, 6.5-7, 6.5-8, 6.5-9, 7-8, 7-9, 8-9, or 8.5-9. In some embodiments, a low pH value (e.g., less than about 6.5, less than about 6, less than about 5.5, or less than about 5, including, e.g., about 3 to about 7, about 3 to about 6.5, about 3 to about 6, about 4 to about 6.5, about 4 to about 6 and the like) has been found to be beneficial for product stability for nicotine-containing oral products. Particularly, low pH values have, in some embodiments, been found to provide improved flavor stability and retention of nicotine over time compared to higher pH oral products. pH measurements can be conducted, e.g., by placing 1.5 g of the composition to be tested (which can be, e.g., two pouches) in 30 mL of water. A stir bar magnet is placed inside the container and the mixture is stirred while conducting the pH measurement using a pH meter with glass electrode.
- According to the present disclosure, it has been found that pouched products comprising a composition comprising nicotine in a resin-bound form, such as nicotine polacrilex, demonstrated an undesirably low percentage of nicotine release from the resin under low pH conditions. Surprisingly, according to the present disclosure, it has been found that increasing the ionic strength of a composition comprising resin-bound nicotine can improve the release of the nicotine from the resin. For example, in some embodiments, calcium hydroxide is particularly useful as a base/pH adjuster. Although not intending to be limited by theory, it is believed that, as a strong base with a multiply-charged cation, calcium hydroxide has greater efficiency at displacing nicotine from the resin than, e.g., sodium hydroxide. Further, use of calcium hydroxide can, in some embodiments, avoid the use of liquid, caustic sodium hydroxide solution or potassium hydroxide, providing certain benefits with respect to safety and handling.
- It has also surprisingly been found according to the present disclosure that including certain organic acids, salts of such organic acids, or a combination thereof, and in particular, selection of the counterions thereof, can also improve the release of the nicotine from the resin. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that ion pair formation in the composition, or during use of the composition, or both, between the resin-bound nicotine and the counterion of the organic acid or salt thereof contributes to or results in such improved nicotine release (which release may be pH dependent).
- A colorant may be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes to the mixture Natural or synthetic colorants, such as natural or synthetic dyes, food-grade colorants and pharmaceutical-grade colorants may be used. Examples of colorants include various dyes and pigments, such as caramel coloring and titanium dioxide. Natural colorants such as curcumin, beet juice extract, spirulina; also a variety of synthetic pigments may also be used. In some embodiments, the colorant is a lake dye, such as a red or blue aluminum lake dye. The amount of colorant utilized in the oral composition can vary, but when present is typically up to about 3% by weight, such as from about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%, to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral composition.
- In some embodiments, the only active ingredient contained within the disclosed oral products is nicotine (i.e., the referenced nicotine component or the first and second nicotine components). However, in some embodiments, the composition as disclosed herein includes one or more active ingredients in addition to such nicotine component(s).
- As used herein, an “active ingredient” refers to one or more substances belonging to any of the following categories: API (active pharmaceutical ingredient), food additives, natural medicaments, and naturally occurring substances that can have an effect on humans. Example active ingredients that can be used in addition to the nicotine component(s) include any ingredient known to impact one or more biological functions within the body, such as ingredients that furnish pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or which affect the structure or any function of the body of humans (e.g., provide a stimulating action on the central nervous system, have an energizing effect, an antipyretic or analgesic action, or an otherwise useful effect on the body). In some embodiments, the optional additional active ingredient may be of the type generally referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, “phytochemicals” or “functional foods.” These types of additives are sometimes defined in the art as encompassing substances typically available from naturally-occurring sources (e.g., botanical materials) that provide one or more advantageous biological effects (e.g., health promotion, disease prevention, or other medicinal properties), but are not classified or regulated as drugs.
- Non-limiting examples of additional active ingredients include those falling in the categories of botanical ingredients, stimulants, amino acids, and/or pharmaceutical, nutraceutical, and medicinal ingredients (e.g., vitamins, such as A, B3, B6, B12, and C, and/or cannabinoids, such as tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and cannabidiol (CBD)). Each of these categories is further described herein below. The particular choice of additional active ingredients, where used, will vary depending upon the desired flavor, texture, and desired characteristics of the particular product.
- In certain embodiments, the additional active ingredient is selected from the group consisting of caffeine, taurine, GABA, theanine, vitamin C, lemon balm extract, ginseng, citicoline, sunflower lecithin, and combinations thereof. For example, the active ingredient can include a combination of caffeine, theanine, and optionally ginseng. In another embodiment, the active ingredient includes a combination of theanine, gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA), and lemon balm extract. In a further embodiment, the active ingredient includes theanine, theanine and tryptophan, or theanine and one or more B vitamins (e.g., vitamin B6 or B12). In a still further embodiment, the active ingredient includes a combination of caffeine, taurine, and vitamin C. The particular percentages of additional active ingredients present will vary depending upon the desired characteristics of the particular product. Typically, such additional active ingredient or combination thereof, where present, is included in a total concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 20%. In some embodiments, the optional additional active ingredient or combination of active ingredients, where present, is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.5% w/w to about 10%, from about 1% to about 10%, from about 1% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the additional active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is included, where present, in a concentration of from about 0.001%, about 0.01%, about 0.1%, or about 1%, up to about 20% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.002%, about 0.003%, about 0.004%, about 0.005%, about 0.006%, about 0.007%, about 0.008%, about 0.009%, about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, or about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. Further suitable ranges for specific active ingredients that can, in some embodiments, be employed in combination with the nicotine component(s) referenced above, are provided herein below.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a botanical ingredient. As used herein, the term “botanical ingredient” or “botanical” refers to any plant material or fungal-derived material, including plant material in its natural form and plant material derived from natural plant materials, such as extracts or isolates from plant materials or treated plant materials (e.g., plant materials subjected to heat treatment, fermentation, bleaching, or other treatment processes capable of altering the physical and/or chemical nature of the material). For the purposes of the present disclosure, a “botanical” includes, but is not limited to, “herbal materials,” which refer to seed-producing plants that do not develop persistent woody tissue and are often valued for their medicinal or sensory characteristics (e.g., teas or tisanes). Reference to botanical material as “non-tobacco” is intended to exclude tobacco materials (i.e., does not include any Nicotiana species). In some embodiments, the compositions as disclosed herein can be characterized as free of any tobacco material (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any tobacco material). By “substantially free” is meant that no tobacco material has been intentionally added. For example, certain embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of tobacco, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of tobacco.
- When present, a botanical is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- The botanical materials useful in the present disclosure may comprise, without limitation, any of the compounds and sources set forth herein, including mixtures thereof. Certain botanical materials of this type are sometimes referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, “phytochemicals” or “functional foods.” Certain botanicals, as the plant material or an extract thereof, have found use in traditional herbal medicine, and are described further herein. Non-limiting examples of botanicals or botanical-derived materials include ashwagandha, Bacopa monniera, baobab, basil, Centella asiatica, Chai-hu, chamomile, cherry blossom, chlorophyll, cinnamon, citrus, cloves, cocoa, cordyceps, curcumin, damiana, Dorstenia arifolia, Dorstenia odorata, essential oils, eucalyptus, fennel, Galphimia glauca, ginger, Ginkgo biloba, ginseng (e.g., Panax ginseng), green tea, Griffonia simplicifolia, guarana, cannabis, hemp, hops, jasmine, Kaempferia parviflora (Thai ginseng), kava, lavender, lemon balm, lemongrass, licorice, lutein, maca, matcha, Nardostachys chinensis, oil-based extract of Viola odorata, peppermint, quercetin, resveratrol, Rhizoma gastrodiae, Rhodiola, rooibos, rose essential oil, rosemary, Sceletium tortuosum, Schisandra, Skullcap, spearmint extract, Spikenard, terpenes, tisanes, turmeric, Turnera aphrodisiaca, valerian, white mulberry, and Yerba mate.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises lemon balm. Lemon balm (Melissa officinalis) is a mildly lemon-scented herb from the same family as mint (Lamiaceae). The herb is native to Europe, North Africa, and West Asia. The tea of lemon balm, as well as the essential oil and the extract, are used in traditional and alternative medicine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises lemon balm extract. In some embodiments, the lemon balm extract is present in an amount of from about 1 to about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises ginseng. Ginseng is the root of plants of the genus Panax, which are characterized by the presence of unique steroid saponin phytochemicals (ginsenosides) and gintonin. Ginseng finds use as a dietary supplement in energy drinks or herbal teas, and in traditional medicine. Cultivated species include Korean ginseng (P. ginseng), South China ginseng (P. notoginseng), and American ginseng (P. quinquefolius). American ginseng and Korean ginseng vary in the type and quantity of various ginsenosides present. In some embodiments, the ginseng is American ginseng or Korean ginseng. In specific embodiments, the active ingredient comprises Korean ginseng. In some embodiments, ginseng is present in an amount of from about 0.4 to about 0.6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more stimulants. As used herein, the term “stimulant” refers to a material that increases activity of the central nervous system and/or the body, for example, enhancing focus, cognition, vigor, mood, alertness, and the like. Non-limiting examples of stimulants include caffeine, theacrine, theobromine, and theophylline. Theacrine (1,3,7,9-tetramethyluric acid) is a purine alkaloid which is structurally related to caffeine, and possesses stimulant, analgesic, and anti-inflammatory effects. Present stimulants may be natural, naturally derived, or wholly synthetic. For example, certain botanical materials (guarana, tea, coffee, cocoa, and the like) may possess a stimulant effect by virtue of the presence of e.g., caffeine or related alkaloids, and accordingly are “natural” stimulants. By “naturally derived” is meant the stimulant (e.g., caffeine, theacrine) is in a purified form, outside its natural (e.g., botanical) matrix. For example, caffeine can be obtained by extraction and purification from botanical sources (e.g., tea). By “wholly synthetic”, it is meant that the stimulant has been obtained by chemical synthesis. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises caffeine. In some embodiments, the caffeine is present in an encapsulated form. On example of an encapsulated caffeine is Vitashure®, available from Balchem Corp., 52 Sunrise Park Road, New Hampton, N.Y., 10958.
- When present, a stimulant or combination of stimulants (e.g., caffeine, theacrine, and combinations thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises caffeine in an amount of from about 1.5 to about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition;
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises an amino acid. As used herein, the term “amino acid” refers to an organic compound that contains amine (—NH2) and carboxyl (—COOH) or sulfonic acid (SO3H) functional groups, along with a side chain (R group), which is specific to each amino acid. Amino acids may be proteinogenic or non-proteinogenic. By “proteinogenic” is meant that the amino acid is one of the twenty naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins. The proteinogenic amino acids include alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. By “non-proteinogenic” is meant that either the amino acid is not found naturally in protein, or is not directly produced by cellular machinery (e.g., is the product of post-translational modification). Non-limiting examples of non-proteinogenic amino acids include gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), taurine (2-aminoethanesulfonic acid), theanine (L-γ-glutamylethylamide), hydroxyproline, and beta-alanine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises theanine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises GABA. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a combination of theanine and GABA. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of theanine, GABA, and lemon balm. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine, theanine, and ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises taurine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine and taurine.
- When present, an amino acid or combination of amino acids (e.g., theanine, GABA, and combinations thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a vitamin or combination of vitamins. As used herein, the term “vitamin” refers to an organic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of metabolism in a mammal. There are thirteen vitamins required by human metabolism, which are: vitamin A (as all-trans-retinol, all-trans-retinyl-esters, as well as all-trans-beta-carotene and other provitamin A carotenoids), vitamin B1 (thiamine), vitamin B2 (riboflavin), vitamin B3 (niacin), vitamin B5 (pantothenic acid), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B7 (biotin), vitamin B9 (folic acid or folate), vitamin B12 (cobalamins), vitamin C (ascorbic acid), vitamin D (calciferols), vitamin E (tocopherols and tocotrienols), and vitamin K (quinones). In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises vitamin C. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of vitamin C, caffeine, and taurine.
- When present, a vitamin or combination of vitamins (e.g., vitamin B6, vitamin B12, vitamin E, vitamin C, or a combination thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 6% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, or about 0.1% w/w, to about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, or about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more antioxidants. As used herein, the term “antioxidant” refers to a substance which prevents or suppresses oxidation by terminating free radical reactions and may delay or prevent some types of cellular damage. Antioxidants may be naturally occurring or synthetic. Naturally occurring antioxidants include those found in foods and botanical materials. Non-limiting examples of antioxidants include certain botanical materials, vitamins, polyphenols, and phenol derivatives.
- Examples of botanical materials which are associated with antioxidant characteristics include without limitation acai berry, alfalfa, allspice, annatto seed, apricot oil, basil, bee balm, wild bergamot, black pepper, blueberries, borage seed oil, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, chaga mushroom, chervil, cinnamon, dark chocolate, potato peel, grape seed, ginseng, gingko biloba, Saint John's Wort, saw palmetto, green tea, black tea, black cohosh, cayenne, chamomile, cloves, cocoa powder, cranberry, dandelion, grapefruit, honeybush, echinacea, garlic, evening primrose, feverfew, ginger, goldenseal, hawthorn, hibiscus flower, jiaogulan, kava, lavender, licorice, marjoram, milk thistle, mints (menthe), oolong tea, beet root, orange, oregano, papaya, pennyroyal, peppermint, red clover, rooibos (red or green), rosehip, rosemary, sage, clary sage, savory, spearmint, spirulina, slippery elm bark, sorghum bran hi-tannin, sorghum grain hi-tannin, sumac bran, comfrey leaf and root, goji berries, gutu kola, thyme, turmeric, uva ursi, valerian, wild yam root, wintergreen, yacon root, yellow dock, yerba mate, yerba santa, Bacopa monniera, withania somnifera, Lion's mane, and silybum marianum. Such botanical materials may be provided in fresh or dry form, essential oils, or may be in the form of an extracts. The botanical materials (as well as their extracts) often include compounds from various classes known to provide antioxidant effects, such as minerals, vitamins, isoflavones, phytoesterols, allyl sulfides, dithiolthiones, isothiocyanates, indoles, lignans, flavonoids, polyphenols, and carotenoids. Examples of compounds found in botanical extracts or oils include ascorbic acid, peanut endocarb, resveratrol, sulforaphane, beta-carotene, lycopene, lutein, co-enzyme Q, carnitine, quercetin, kaempferol, and the like. See, e.g., Santhosh et al., Phytomedicine, 12(2005) 216-220, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Non-limiting examples of other suitable antioxidants include citric acid, Vitamin E or a derivative thereof, a tocopherol, epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate, erythorbic acid, sodium erythorbate, 4-hexylresorcinol, theaflavin, theaflavin monogallate A or B, theaflavin digallate, phenolic acids, glycosides, quercitrin, isoquercitrin, hyperoside, polyphenols, catechols, resveratrols, oleuropein, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), tertiary butylhydroquinone (TBHQ), and combinations thereof.
- When present, an antioxidant is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.005%, about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more cannabinoids. As used herein, the term “cannabinoid” refers to a class of diverse chemical compounds that acts on cannabinoid receptors, also known as the endocannabinoid system, in cells that alter neurotransmitter release in the brain. Ligands for these receptor proteins include the endocannabinoids produced naturally in the body by animals; phytocannabinoids, found in cannabis; and synthetic cannabinoids, manufactured artificially. Cannabinoids found in cannabis include, without limitation: cannabigerol (CBG), cannabichromene (CBC), cannabidiol (CBD), tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), cannabinol (CBN), cannabinodiol (CBDL), cannabicyclol (CBL), cannabivarin (CBV), tetrahydrocannabivarin (THCV), cannabidivarin (CBDV), cannabichromevarin (CBCV), cannabigerovarin (CBGV), cannabigerol monomethyl ether (CBGM), cannabinerolic acid, cannabidiolic acid (CBDA), cannabinol propyl variant (CBNV), cannabitriol (CBO), tetrahydrocannabinolic acid (THCA), and tetrahydrocannabivarinic acid (THCV A). In certain embodiments, the cannabinoid is selected from tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the primary psychoactive compound in cannabis, and cannabidiol (CBD) another major constituent of the plant, but which is devoid of psychoactivity. All of the above compounds can be used in the form of an isolate from plant material or synthetically derived.
- Alternatively, the active ingredient can be a cannabimimetic, which is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids. Examples include yangonin, alpha-amyrin or beta-amyrin (also classified as terpenes), cyanidin, curcumin (tumeric), catechin, quercetin, salvinorin A, N-acylethanolamines, and N-alkylamide lipids.
- When present, a cannabinoid (e.g., CBD) or cannabimimetic is typically in a concentration of at least about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.1% to about 30%, such as, e.g., from about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, or about 30% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- Active ingredients suitable for use in the present disclosure can also be classified as terpenes, many of which are associated with biological effects, such as calming effects. Terpenes are understood to have the general formula of (C5H8)n and include monoterpenes, sesquiterpenes, and diterpenes. Terpenes can be acyclic, monocyclic or bicyclic in structure. Some terpenes provide an entourage effect when used in combination with cannabinoids or cannabimimetics. Examples include beta-caryophyllene, linalool, limonene, beta-citronellol, linalyl acetate, pinene (alpha or beta), geraniol, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, and germacrene, which may be used singly or in combination.
- In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API). The API can be any known agent adapted for therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic use. These can include, for example, synthetic organic compounds, proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcholine, dopamine, melatonin), and nucleic acid sequences, having therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic activity. Non-limiting examples of APIs include analgesics and antipyretics (e.g., acetylsalicylic acid, acetaminophen, 3-(4-isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid), phosphatidylserine, myoinositol, docosahexaenoic acid (DHA, Omega-3), arachidonic acid (AA, Omega-6), S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), beta-hydroxy-beta-methylbutyrate (HMB), citicoline (cytidine-5′-diphosphate-choline), and cotinine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises citicoline. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of citicoline, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises sunflower lecithin. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of sunflower lecithin, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng.
- The amount of API may vary. For example, when present, an API is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, or about 1%, to about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
- In some embodiments, the composition is substantially free of any API. By “substantially free of any API” means that the composition does not contain, and specifically excludes, the presence of any API as defined herein, such as any Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved therapeutic agent intended to treat any medical condition.
- In some embodiments, the mixture may include a tobacco material. The tobacco material can vary in species, type, and form. Generally, the tobacco material is obtained from for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species. Example Nicotiana species include N. tabacum, N. rustica, N. alata, N. arentsii, N. excelsior, N. forgetiana, N. glauca, N. glutinosa, N. gossei, N. kawakamii, N. knightiana, N. langsdorffi, N. otophora, N. setchelli, N. sylvestris, N. tomentosa, N. tomentosiformis, N. undulata, N. x sanderae, N. africana, N. amplexicaulis, N. benavidesii, N. bonariensis, N. debneyi, N. longiflora, N. maritina, N. megalosiphon, N. occidentalis, N. paniculata, N. plumbaginifolia, N. raimondii, N. rosulata, N. simulans, N. stocktonii, N. suaveolens, N. umbratica, N. velutina, N. wigandioides, N. acaulis, N. acuminata, N. attenuata, N. benthamiana, N. cavicola, N. clevelandii, N. cordifolia, N. corymbosa, N. fragrans, N. goodspeedii, N. linearis, N. miersii, N. nudicaulis, N. obtusifolia, N. occidentalis subsp. Hersperis, N. pauciflora, N. petunioides, N. quadrivalvis, N. repanda, N. rotundifolia, N. solanifolia, and N. spegazzinii. Various representative other types of plants from the Nicotiana species are set forth in Goodspeed, The Genus Nicotiana, (Chonica Botanica) (1954); U.S. Pat. No. 4,660,577 to Sensabaugh, Jr. et al.; 5,387,416 to White et al., U.S. Pat. No. 7,025,066 to Lawson et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,798,153 to Lawrence, Jr. and 8,186,360 to Marshall et al.; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Descriptions of various types of tobaccos, growing practices and harvesting practices are set forth in Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology, Davis et al. (Eds.) (1999), which is incorporated herein by reference.
- Nicotiana species from which suitable tobacco materials can be obtained can be derived using genetic-modification or crossbreeding techniques (e.g., tobacco plants can be genetically engineered or crossbred to increase or decrease production of components, characteristics or attributes). See, for example, the types of genetic modifications of plants set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,093 to Fitzmaurice et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,668,295 to Wahab et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,624 to Fitzmaurice et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,844,119 to Weigl; U.S. Pat. No. 6,730,832 to Dominguez et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,173,170 to Liu et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,208,659 to Colliver et al. and 7,230,160 to Benning et al.; US Patent Appl. Pub. No. 2006/0236434 to Conkling et al.; and PCT WO2008/103935 to Nielsen et al. See, also, the types of tobaccos that are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,660,577 to Sensabaugh, Jr. et al.; 5,387,416 to White et al.; and 6,730,832 to Dominguez et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The Nicotiana species can, in some embodiments, be selected for the content of various compounds that are present therein. For example, plants can be selected on the basis that those plants produce relatively high quantities of one or more of the compounds desired to be isolated therefrom. In certain embodiments, plants of the Nicotiana species (e.g., Galpao commun tobacco) are specifically grown for their abundance of leaf surface compounds. Tobacco plants can be grown in greenhouses, growth chambers, or outdoors in fields, or grown hydroponically.
- Various parts or portions of the plant of the Nicotiana species can be included within a mixture as disclosed herein. For example, virtually all of the plant (e.g., the whole plant) can be harvested, and employed as such. Alternatively, various parts or pieces of the plant can be harvested or separated for further use after harvest. For example, the flower, leaves, stem, stalk, roots, seeds, and various combinations thereof, can be isolated for further use or treatment. In some embodiments, the tobacco material comprises tobacco leaf (lamina). The mixture disclosed herein can include processed tobacco parts or pieces, cured and aged tobacco in essentially natural lamina and/or stem form, a tobacco extract, extracted tobacco pulp (e.g., using water as a solvent), or a mixture of the foregoing (e.g., a mixture that combines extracted tobacco pulp with granulated cured and aged natural tobacco lamina).
- In certain embodiments, the tobacco material comprises solid tobacco material selected from the group consisting of lamina and stems. The tobacco that is used for the mixture most preferably includes tobacco lamina, or a tobacco lamina and stem mixture (of which at least a portion is smoke-treated). Portions of the tobaccos within the mixture may have processed forms, such as processed tobacco stems (e.g., cut-rolled stems, cut-rolled-expanded stems or cut-puffed stems), or volume expanded tobacco (e.g., puffed tobacco, such as dry ice expanded tobacco (DIET)). See, for example, the tobacco expansion processes set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,340,073 to de la Burde et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,259,403 to Guy et al.; and 5,908,032 to Poindexter, et al.; and 7,556,047 to Poindexter, et al., all of which are incorporated by reference. In addition, the d mixture optionally may incorporate tobacco that has been fermented. See, also, the types of tobacco processing techniques set forth in PCT WO2005/063060 to Atchley et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The tobacco material is typically used in a form that can be described as particulate (i.e., shredded, ground, granulated, or powder form). The manner by which the tobacco material is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary. Preferably, plant parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a particulate form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like. Most preferably, the plant material is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like. For example, tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent or less than about 5 weight percent. Most preferably, the tobacco material is employed in the form of parts or pieces that have an average particle size between 1.4 millimeters and 250 microns. In some instances, the tobacco particles may be sized to pass through a screen mesh to obtain the particle size range required. If desired, air classification equipment may be used to ensure that small sized tobacco particles of the desired sizes, or range of sizes, may be collected. If desired, differently sized pieces of granulated tobacco may be mixed together.
- The manner by which the tobacco is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary. Preferably, tobacco parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a powder type of form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like. Most preferably, the tobacco is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like. For example, tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent to less than about 5 weight percent. For example, the tobacco plant or portion thereof can be separated into individual parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be removed from the stems, and/or the stems and leaves can be removed from the stalk). The harvested plant or individual parts or pieces can be further subdivided into parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be shredded, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled or ground into pieces or parts that can be characterized as filler-type pieces, granules, particulates or fine powders). The plant, or parts thereof, can be subjected to external forces or pressure (e.g., by being pressed or subjected to roll treatment). When carrying out such processing conditions, the plant or portion thereof can have a moisture content that approximates its natural moisture content (e.g., its moisture content immediately upon harvest), a moisture content achieved by adding moisture to the plant or portion thereof, or a moisture content that results from the drying of the plant or portion thereof. For example, powdered, pulverized, ground or milled pieces of plants or portions thereof can have moisture contents of less than about 25 weight percent, often less than about 20 weight percent, and frequently less than about 15 weight percent.
- For the preparation of oral products, it is typical for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species to be subjected to a curing process. The tobacco materials incorporated within the mixture for inclusion within products as disclosed herein are those that have been appropriately cured and/or aged. Descriptions of various types of curing processes for various types of tobaccos are set forth in Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology, Davis et al. (Eds.) (1999). Examples of techniques and conditions for curing flue-cured tobacco are set forth in Nestor et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 20, 467-475 (2003) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,895,974 to Peele, which are incorporated herein by reference. Representative techniques and conditions for air curing tobacco are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 7,650,892 to Groves et al.; Roton et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 21, 305-320 (2005) and Staaf et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 21, 321-330 (2005), which are incorporated herein by reference. Certain types of tobaccos can be subjected to alternative types of curing processes, such as fire curing or sun curing.
- In certain embodiments, tobacco materials that can be employed include flue-cured or Virginia (e.g., K326), burley, sun-cured (e.g., Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos, including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos), Maryland, dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passanda, Cubano, Jatin and Bezuki tobaccos), light air cured (e.g., North Wisconsin and Galpao tobaccos), Indian air cured, Red Russian and Rustica tobaccos, as well as various other rare or specialty tobaccos and various blends of any of the foregoing tobaccos.
- The tobacco material may also have a so-called “blended” form. For example, the tobacco material may include a mixture of parts or pieces of flue-cured, burley (e.g., Malawi burley tobacco) and Oriental tobaccos (e.g., as tobacco composed of, or derived from, tobacco lamina, or a mixture of tobacco lamina and tobacco stem). For example, a representative blend may incorporate about 30 to about 70 parts burley tobacco (e.g., lamina, or lamina and stem), and about 30 to about 70 parts flue cured tobacco (e.g., stem, lamina, or lamina and stem) on a dry weight basis. Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 75 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 15 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 25 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 10 parts burley tobacco, and about 25 parts Oriental tobacco; on a dry weight basis. Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 20 to about 30 parts Oriental tobacco and about 70 to about 80 parts flue-cured tobacco on a dry weight basis.
- Tobacco materials used in the present disclosure can be subjected to, for example, fermentation, bleaching, and the like. If desired, the tobacco materials can be, for example, irradiated, pasteurized, or otherwise subjected to controlled heat treatment. Such treatment processes are detailed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 8,061,362 to Mua et al., which is incorporated herein by reference. In certain embodiments, tobacco materials can be treated with water and an additive capable of inhibiting reaction of asparagine to form acrylamide upon heating of the tobacco material (e.g., an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di- and trivalent cations, asparaginase, certain non-reducing saccharides, certain reducing agents, phenolic compounds, certain compounds having at least one free thiol group or functionality, oxidizing agents, oxidation catalysts, natural plant extracts (e.g., rosemary extract), and combinations thereof. See, for example, the types of treatment processes described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,434,496, 8,944,072, and 8,991,403 to Chen et al., which are all incorporated herein by reference. In certain embodiments, this type of treatment is useful where the original tobacco material is subjected to heat in the processes previously described.
- In some embodiments, the type of tobacco material is selected such that it is initially visually lighter in color than other tobacco materials to some degree (e.g., whitened or bleached). Tobacco pulp can be whitened in certain embodiments according to any means known in the art. For example, bleached tobacco material produced by various whitening methods using various bleaching or oxidizing agents and oxidation catalysts can be used. Example oxidizing agents include peroxides (e.g., hydrogen peroxide), chlorite salts, chlorate salts, perchlorate salts, hypochlorite salts, ozone, ammonia, potassium permanganate, and combinations thereof. Example oxidation catalysts are titanium dioxide, manganese dioxide, and combinations thereof. Processes for treating tobacco with bleaching agents are discussed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 787,611 to Daniels, Jr.; U.S. Pat. No. 1,086,306 to Oelenheinz; U.S. Pat. No. 1,437,095 to Delling; U.S. Pat. No. 1,757,477 to Rosenhoch; U.S. Pat. No. 2,122,421 to Hawkinson; U.S. Pat. No. 2,148,147 to Baier; U.S. Pat. No. 2,170,107 to Baier; U.S. Pat. No. 2,274,649 to Baier; U.S. Pat. No. 2,770,239 to Prats et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 3,612,065 to Rosen; U.S. Pat. No. 3,851,653 to Rosen; U.S. Pat. No. 3,889,689 to Rosen; U.S. Pat. No. 3,943,940 to Minami; U.S. Pat. No. 3,943,945 to Rosen; U.S. Pat. No. 4,143,666 to Rainer; U.S. Pat. No. 4,194,514 to Campbell; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,366,823, 4,366,824, and 4,388,933 to Rainer et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 4,641,667 to Schmekel et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,713,376 to Berger; U.S. Pat. No. 9,339,058 to Byrd Jr. et al.; 9,420,825 to Beeson et al.; and 9,950,858 to Byrd Jr. et al.; as well as in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 2012/0067361 to Bjorkholm et al.; 2016/0073686 to Crooks; 2017/0020183 to Bjorkholm; and 2017/0112183 to Bjorkholm, and in PCT Publ. Appl. Nos. WO1996/031255 to Giolvas and WO2018/083114 to Bjorkholm, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness of at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or at least about 80%. In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness in the range of about 50% to about 90%, about 55% to about 75%, or about 60% to about 70%. ISO brightness can be measured according to ISO 3688:1999 or ISO 2470-1:2016.
- In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can be characterized as lightened in color (e.g., “whitened”) in comparison to an untreated tobacco material. White colors are often defined with reference to the International Commission on Illumination's (CIE's) chromaticity diagram. The whitened tobacco material can, in certain embodiments, be characterized as closer on the chromaticity diagram to pure white than an untreated tobacco material.
- Typical inclusion ranges for tobacco materials can vary depending on the nature and type of the tobacco material, and the intended effect on the final mixture, with an example range of up to about 30% by weight (or up to about 20% by weight or up to about 10% by weight or up to about 5% by weight), based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 15% by weight). In some embodiments, a tobacco material (e.g., a whitened tobacco material) is included in a relatively small amount (e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.1% by weight).
- In some embodiments, the products of the disclosure can be characterized as completely free or substantially free of tobacco material (other than purified nicotine as an active ingredient). For example, certain embodiments can be characterized as having less than 1% by weight, or less than 0.5% by weight, or less than 0.1% by weight of tobacco material, or 0% by weight of tobacco material.
- Other additives can be included in the disclosed mixture. For example, the mixture can be processed, blended, formulated, combined and/or mixed with other materials or ingredients. The additives can be artificial, or can be obtained or derived from herbal or biological sources. Examples of further types of additives include thickening or gelling agents (e.g., fish gelatin), emulsifiers, oral care additives (e.g., thyme oil, eucalyptus oil, and zinc), preservatives (e.g., potassium sorbate and the like), zinc or magnesium salts selected to be relatively water soluble for compositions with greater water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc gluconate) or selected to be relatively water insoluble for compositions with reduced water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc oxide), disintegration aids, or combinations thereof. See, for example, those representative components, combination of components, relative amounts of those components, and manners and methods for employing those components, set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 9,237,769 to Mua et al., U.S. Pat. No. 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al., US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2010/0291245 to Gao et al., and US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2007/0062549 to Holton, Jr. et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Typical inclusion ranges for such additional additives can vary depending on the nature and function of the additive and the intended effect on the final mixture, with an example range of up to about 10% by weight, based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 5% by weight).
- The aforementioned additives can be employed together (e.g., as additive formulations) or separately (e.g., individual additive components can be added at different stages involved in the preparation of the final mixture). Furthermore, the aforementioned types of additives may be encapsulated as provided in the final product or mixture. Example encapsulated additives are described, for example, in WO2010/132444 to Atchley, which has been previously incorporated by reference herein.
- In some specific embodiments, the disclosed compositions can comprise (in addition to the nicotine component(s) described), a filler component (e.g., MCC), a base (e.g., NaOH), a sweetener (e.g., xylitol, sucralose, and/or acesulfame K, or the like), a salt, and a flavorant. In some embodiments, the composition comprises: 0% to about 1.5% of free base nicotine; about 2% to about 8% by weight of a nicotine polymer complex (e.g., comprising 20% nicotine); about 3% to about 6% by weight of a base; about 2% to about 8% by weight of a salt, 30% to about 50% by weight of a filler, about 1% to about 5% by weight of a sweetener, and about 0.5% to about 2.5% by weight of a flavorant, all based on the total weight of the composition within the pouched product, including the additional water sprayed onto the pouched product after pouching, as described further herein below.
- Generally, the products of the disclosure can have widely varying nicotine release rates. The pH of the composition may, in some embodiments, affect the rate of release of nicotine from the nicotine-polymer complex. Dissolution and counterions confirms that pH impacts the extraction of nicotine from the resin. For example, reducing the pH of the composition may slow the release of nicotine therefrom. However, as referenced herein above, the inclusion of certain alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salts can enhance release of nicotine from the resin, even at low pH values.
- As noted above, in some embodiments, the inclusion of two nicotine components in some embodiments can provide for two different rates of release of nicotine from a given product within the oral cavity. For example, the first nicotine component (which may provide for somewhat immediate or fast release) may be released more quickly than the second nicotine component (which may provide for more extended release of nicotine). In some embodiments, the nicotine is released from the disclosed compositions/products within the user's oral cavity over a period of at least about 30 minutes, at least about 40 minutes, at least about 45 minutes, at least about 50 minutes, at least about 55 minutes, or at least about 60 minutes, e.g., about 30 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 30 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 40 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 45 minutes to about 60 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 120 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 90 minutes, about 50 minutes to about 80 minutes, or about 50 minutes to about 70 minutes. In some embodiments, about 80% of the nicotine is released from the pouched product after 90 minutes of use.
- The moisture content of the products provided herein can vary. In some embodiments, the moisture content of the disclosed pouched products is above about 5% by weight, e.g., about 5% to about 50%. In some embodiments, the moisture content of the disclosed pouched products is about 48% or below (e.g., including about 5% to about 48%). In some embodiments, the products have a moisture content that is above about 15% by weight, above about 20% by weight, above about 25% by weight, above about 30% by weight, or above about 40% by weight, based on the entirety of the pouched product. Certain examples of total moisture content according to certain embodiments include about 5% to about 50%, about 5 to about 48%, about 10% to about 50%, about 10% to about 48%, about 15% to about 50%, about 15% to about 48%, about 25% to about 35%, about 25% to about 50%, about 25% to about 48%, about 30% to about 50%, about 30% to about 48%, about 30% to about 35%, about 40% to about 50%, about 40% to about 48%, about 45% to about 50%, or about 45% to about 48% by weight. Such total moisture content includes, e.g., water in the composition within the pouched composition and additional water added to the product, e.g., sprayed onto the outside of the product after pouching.
- In some embodiments, any one or more of a filler component, a tobacco material, and the overall oral product described herein can be described as a particulate material. As used herein, the term “particulate” refers to a material in the form of a plurality of individual particles, some of which can be in the form of an agglomerate of multiple particles, wherein the particles have an average length to width ratio less than 2:1, such as less than 1.5:1, such as about 1:1. In various embodiments, the particles of a particulate material can be described as substantially spherical or granular.
- The manner by which the various components of the mixture are combined may vary. As such, the overall mixture of various components with e.g., powdered mixture components may be relatively uniform in nature. The components noted above, which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components of the mixture, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients.
- In some embodiments, the nicotine component/first nicotine component (i.e., the nicotine polymer complex) may not be water soluble; as such, in some such embodiments, the order of mixing may be important. In certain embodiments, a composition is provided as follows. Dry ingredients, including the filler and the first nicotine component (i.e., the nicotine-polymer complex) are combined to give a dry phase. Wet ingredients, including the second nicotine component (e.g., in aqueous solution form) and flavorant are separately combined to give a liquid phase. Additional ingredients, such as sweeteners are added to the liquid phase. The dry phase and liquid phase are mixed; a base is added to the mixture, e.g., while blending. Additional water is generally added to the pouches during pouching, as referenced herein below, to achieve the desired moisture content.
- The various components of the mixture to be pouched may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art. Any mixing method that brings the mixture ingredients into intimate contact can be used, such as a mixing apparatus featuring an impeller or other structure capable of agitation. Examples of mixing equipment include casing drums, conditioning cylinders or drums, liquid spray apparatus, conical-type blenders, ribbon blenders, mixers available as FKM130, FKM600, FKM1200, FKM2000 and FKM3000 from Littleford Day, Inc., Plough Share types of mixer cylinders, Hobart mixers, and the like. See also, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 6,510,855 to Korte et al.; and 6,834,654 to Williams, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, the components forming the mixture are prepared such that the mixture thereof may be used in a starch molding process for forming the mixture. Manners and methods for formulating mixtures will be apparent to those skilled in the art. See, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 6,510,855 to Korte et al.; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,834,654 to Williams, U.S. Pat. No. 4,725,440 to Ridgway et al., and 6,077,524 to Bolder et al., each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- In various embodiments, a moisture-permeable packet or pouch can act as a container for use of the composition within. For example, the pouch provides a liquid-permeable container of a type that may be considered to be similar in character to the mesh-like type of material that is used for the construction of a tea bag. If desired, flavoring ingredients, disintegration aids, and other desired components, may be incorporated within, or applied to, the pouch material. The composition/construction of such packets or pouches, such as the
container pouch 20 in the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 1 , may be varied as noted herein. For example, suitable packets, pouches or containers of the type used for the manufacture of smokeless tobacco products, which can be modified according to the present disclosure, are available under the tradenames CatchDry, Ettan, General, Granit, Goteborgs Rape, Grovsnus White, Metropol Kaktus, Mocca Anis, Mocca Mint, Mocca Wintergreen, Kicks, Probe, Prince, Skruf and TreAnkrare. A pouch type of product similar in shape and form to various embodiments of a pouched product described herein is commercially available as ZONNIC (distributed by Niconovum AB). Additionally, pouch type products generally similar in shape and form to various embodiments of a pouched product are set forth as snuff bag compositions E-J in Example 1 of PCT WO 2007/104573 to Axelsson et al., which is incorporated herein by reference, which are produced using excipient ingredients and processing conditions that can be used to manufacture pouched products as described herein. - The pouches can be formed from a fleece material, e.g., fibrous nonwoven webs. As used herein, the term “fiber” is defined as a basic element of textiles. Fibers are often in the form of a rope- or string-like element. As used herein, the term “fiber” is intended to include fibers, filaments, continuous filaments, staple fibers, and the like. The term “multicomponent fibers” refers to fibers that comprise two or more components that are different by physical or chemical nature, including bicomponent fibers. Specifically, the term “multicomponent fibers” includes staple and continuous fibers prepared from two or more polymers present in discrete structured domains in the fiber, as opposed to blends where the domains tend to be dispersed, random or unstructured.
- A “fleece material” as used herein may be formed from various types of fibers (e.g., cellulosic fibers; such as viscose fibers, regenerated cellulose fibers, cellulose fibers, and wood pulps; cotton fibers; other natural fibers; or polymer/synthetic-type fibers) capable of being formed into a traditional fleece fabrics or other traditional pouch materials. For example, fleece materials may be provided in the form of a woven or nonwoven fabric. Suitable types of fleece materials, for example, are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,931,493 to Sebastian et al.; US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0000140 to Sebastian et al.; and US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0073689 to Sebastian et al.; which are all incorporated herein by reference.
- The term “nonwoven” is used herein in reference to fibrous materials, webs, mats, batts, or sheets in which fibers are aligned in an undefined or random orientation. The nonwoven fibers are initially presented as unbound fibers or filaments. An important step in the manufacturing of nonwovens involves binding the various fibers or filaments together. The manner in which the fibers or filaments are bound can vary, and include thermal, mechanical and chemical techniques that are selected in part based on the desired characteristics of the final product, as discussed in more detail below.
- In various embodiments, the pouch material can be dissolvable (i.e., orally ingestible) such that under conditions of normal use (i.e., upon contact with saliva in the mouth of a user), the pouch material dissolves. Preferably, the pouch material will dissolve after a significant amount of the soluble components of the composition within the pouch (e.g., active ingredient(s) and/or flavorant(s)) permeate through the pouch material into the mouth of the user. For example, the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate such that the pouch material holds the composition together for a period of time sufficient to allow for the release of substantially all water soluble components. As described herein, in certain embodiments, the composition within the pouch material can also be dissolvable. In such embodiments, the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate similar to the rate at which the composition dissolves. In certain embodiments, the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in about 5 minutes or longer, about 15 minutes or longer, about 30 minutes or longer, or about an hour or longer. In certain embodiments, the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in no less than 30 minutes, no less than 45 minutes, or no less than an hour. In some embodiments, the pouch material may be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in a time of about 30 seconds to about 30 minutes, about 1 minute to about 25 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes. Without being limited by theory, a pouched product comprising a dissolvable pouch material can provide environmental advantages.
- In various embodiments, dissolvable pouch materials can include, but are not limited to, spun or nonwoven alginate fibers, gluten fibers, mini-perforated flat sheets derived from alginate, carrageenan, and other polymer binders, and combinations thereof. Without being limited by theory, the dissolution rate of the pouch material can be controlled by the use of cross-linking technology between alginate or pectin and calcium salts, for example. In certain embodiments, the dissolvable pouch material can include fast dissolving fibers formed using an electrospinning process (e.g., solution-based electrospinning) with hydrophilic polymers. See, e.g., the techniques and fibers disclosed in Asawahame, Chawalinee et al., Formation of Orally Fast Dissolving Fibers Containing Propolis by Electrospinning Technique, Chiang Mai J. Sci. 2015; 42(2), p. 469-480, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, the fibers within the fleece material may include, but are not limited to, a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polyhydroxyalkanoates, polycaprolactone, polybutylene succinate, polybutylene succinate adipate, and copolymers thereof. In some embodiments, the fibers within the fleece material may be selected from the groups consisting wool, cotton, fibers made of cellulosic material, such as regenerated cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose nitrate, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl hydroxypropyl cellulose, protein fibers, and the like. See also, the fiber types set forth in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0083438 to Sebastian et al., which is incorporated by reference herein. In various embodiments, the pouch material can include a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, and combinations thereof.
- Regenerated cellulose fibers (e.g., viscose or lyocell fibers) can be particularly advantageous, and are typically prepared by extracting non-cellulosic compounds from wood, contacting the extracted wood with caustic soda, followed by carbon disulfide and then by sodium hydroxide, giving a viscous solution. The solution is subsequently forced through spinneret heads to create viscous threads of regenerated fibers. Example methods for the preparation of regenerated cellulose are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,274 to Leoni et al; U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,666 to Baldini et al; U.S. Pat. No. 4,252,766 to Baldini et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 4,388,256 to Ishida et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 4,535,028 to Yokogi et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,441,689 to Laity; U.S. Pat. No. 5,997,790 to Vos et al.; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,177,938 to Sumnicht, which are incorporated herein by reference. The manner in which the regenerated cellulose is made is not limiting, and can include, for example, both the rayon and the TENCEL processes. Various suppliers of regenerated cellulose are known, including Lenzing (Austria), Cordenka (Germany), Aditya Birla (India), and Daicel (Japan).
- The fibers used in the nonwoven web according to the present disclosure can vary, and include fibers having any type of cross-section, including, but not limited to, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, and multilobal. In certain embodiments, the fibers can have one or more void spaces, wherein the void spaces can have, for example, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, or multilobal cross-sections. As noted previously, the fibers can be selected from single-component (i.e., uniform in composition throughout the fiber) or multicomponent fiber types including, but not limited to, fibers having a sheath/core structure and fibers having an islands-in-the-sea structure, as well as fibers having a side-by-side, segmented pie, segmented cross, segmented ribbon, or tipped multilobal cross-sections.
- The physical parameters of the fibers present in the nonwoven web can vary. For example, the fibers used in the nonwoven web can have varying size (e.g., length, dpf) and crimp characteristics. In some embodiments, fibers used in the nonwoven web can be nano fibers, sub-micron fibers, and/or micron-sized fibers. In certain embodiments, fibers of the nonwoven webs useful herein can measure about 1.5 dpf to about 2.0 dpf, or about 1.6 dpf to about 1.90 dpf. In a preferred embodiment, each fiber can be a staple fiber. Each fiber length can measure about 35 mm to about 60 mm, or about 38 mm to about 55 mm, for example. In various embodiments, each fiber can measure about 4-10 crimps per cm, or about 5-8 crimps per cm. It can be advantageous for all fibers in the nonwoven web to have similar fiber size and crimp attributes to ensure favorable blending and orientation of the fibers in the nonwoven web.
- The fibrous webs can have varying thicknesses, porosities and other parameters. The nonwoven web can be formed such that the fiber orientation and porosity of the pouched product formed therefrom can retain the composition adapted for oral use that is enclosed within the outer water-permeable pouch, but can also allow the flavors of the composition to be enjoyed by the consumer. For example, in some embodiments, the fibrous webs can have a basis weight of about 20 gsm to about 60 gsm, about 20 gsm to about 35 gsm, or about 25 gsm to about 30 gsm. In a preferred embodiment, the fibrous web can have a basis weight of about 28 gsm. Basis weight of a fabric can be measured using ASTM D3776/D3776M-09a (2013) (Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric), for example. In various embodiments, the fibrous web can have a thickness of about 0.1 mm to about 0.15 mm (e.g., about 0.11 mm). The fibrous web can have an elongation of about 70% to about 80%, e.g., about 78%. In some embodiments, the fibrous web can have a peak load of about 4 lbs. to about 8 lbs., e.g., about 5.5 lbs. Elongation and breaking strength of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D5034-09(2013) (Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)), for example. In various embodiments, the fibrous web can have a Tensile Energy Absorption (TEA) of about 35 to about 40, e.g., about 37. In certain embodiments, the fibrous web can have a porosity of greater than about 10,000 ml/min/cm2. TEA can be measured, for example, as the work done to break the specimen under tensile loading per lateral area of the specimen. Porosity, or air permeability of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D737-04(2012) (Standard Test method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics), for example.
- In various embodiments of the pouched product described herein, the outer water-permeable pouch is made from a nonwoven web as described above. In some embodiments, a pouch is constructed of a single layer of the nonwoven web. In various embodiments, the pouch material comprises a multilayer composite made up of two or more nonwoven layers, each layer being orally ingestible. Each nonwoven layer can be formed by processes discussed below. In a multilayer structure, a first layer can be relatively hydrophilic and a second layer can be relatively hydrophobic (compared to each other). In some embodiments, an outer water-permeable pouch can comprise an outer hydrophilic layer and an inner hydrophobic layer that can be in contact with the composition adapted for oral use. As such, the hydrophobic layer can, during storage of the pouched product, retain any moisture in the composition adapted for oral use such that flavors in the composition are not lost due to moisture loss. However, capillaries in the hydrophobic layer can wick out moisture into the mouth of the user, such that flavors are released into the oral cavity when used. In this manner, the pouch material can enhance storage stability without significantly compromising the enjoyment of the product by the end user. In less preferred embodiments, the relatively hydrophilic layer could be located on the interior of the multi-layer structure. The two layers can be formed into a multi-layer composite nonwoven material using any means known in the art, such as by attaching the two layers together using adhesive or stitching. The hydrophobicity of a textile material can be evaluated, for example, by measuring the contact angles between a drop of liquid and the surface of a textile material, as is known in the art.
- In certain embodiments, the pouch material can comprise a flavor component (such as any of the flavor components noted herein), which can be applied to the nonwoven layer in any conventional manner such as by coating, printing, and the like. In some embodiments of a pouched product described herein, the flavor within an outer pouch material can differ from a flavor contained within the internal composition adapted for oral use. For example, in certain embodiments, the pouch material can have a first flavor component and after the pouch material has dissolved, more moisture can reach the composition within the pouch material and a flavor component within the composition can be enhanced. In this manner, the product can be designed to provide multiple, different sensory experiences, a first sensory experience where the flavor in the outer pouch material transitions into the mouth of the user and a second sensory experience, typically occurring later in time, where the flavor of the internal composition transitions into the mouth of the user.
- In some embodiments, a heat sealable binder coating or a binder material (e.g., a coating or other additive) may be added to the fibers prior to, during, or after forming the fleece material. As used herein, “heat sealable binder coatings” refers to coating materials, such as acrylic polymer compositions, applied to a substrate (e.g., a nonwoven web or fleece material) and which are capable of sealing seams of individual pouches upon heating. In some embodiments, a binder material can be added to the web fibers before or during the laying of the fibrous web (i.e., before the fibrous web is bonded to form a fleece material). In certain embodiments, a binder material can be added to the fleece material after it has been formed. In various embodiments, the binder material is in the form of a liquid coating. In certain embodiments, a binding powder can be applied to the fleece material. For example, powdered polyethylene can be used as a binder material. The liquid or powder coating can be applied, for example, between layers of fibers when cross-laying, air laying, or as an after treatment. A short exposure in an oven is sufficient to melt and fuse the binder material.
- The means of producing the nonwoven web can vary. Web formation can be accomplished by any means known in the art. Web formation will typically involve a carding step, which involves deposition of the fibers onto a surface followed by aligning/blending the fibers in a machine direction. Thereafter, the fibrous web is typically subjected to some type of bonding/entanglement including, but not limited to, thermal fusion or bonding, mechanical entanglement, chemical adhesive, or a combination thereof. In one embodiment, the fibrous web is bonded thermally using a calendar (which can provide flat or point bonding), steam jet bonding, or a thru-air oven. Additional bonding methods include ultrasonic bonding and crimping. In some embodiments, needle punching is utilized, wherein needles are used to provide physical entanglement between fibers. In one embodiment, the web is entangled using hydroentanglement, which is a process used to entangle and bond fibers using hydrodynamic forces. As noted above, a binder material can be applied to the fibers of the fibrous web before laying the fibrous web, during formation of the fibrous web, and/or after the fibrous web has been bonded to form a fleece material. After forming the fleece material, heat can be applied to the fleece material in order to activate/at least partially melt the binder material to further bond the fleece material and thereby further enhance the mechanical integrity of the fleece material.
- Methods for forming a nonwoven web comprising natural and synthetic fibers may include drylaid, airlaid and wetlaid methods. In some embodiments, the nonwoven fabric can be formed using a spunlaid or spunmelt process, which includes both spunbond and meltblown processes, wherein such processes are understood to typically entail melting, extruding, collecting and bonding thermoplastic polymer materials to form a fibrous nonwoven web. The technique of meltblowing is known in the art and is discussed in various patents, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 3,849,241 to Butin, U.S. Pat. No. 3,987,185 to Buntin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,972,759 to Buntin, and 4,622,259 to McAmish et al., each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. General spunbonding processes are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,340,563 to Appel et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,692,618 to Dorschner et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,802,817 to Matsuki et al., U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,338,992 and 3,341,394 to Kinney, U.S. Pat. No. 3,502,763 to Hartmann, and 30 U.S. Pat. No. 3,542,615 to Dobo et al., which are all incorporated herein by reference.
- In various embodiments, the nonwoven web is made by providing a dry laid or a spun laid web of fibers, and then needle punching the web to bond the dry laid or spun laid web. The needle punched fleece material is produced when barbed needles are pushed through the fibrous web, forcing some fibers upwards or downwards through the web by the barbed needles. The fibers punched through the web remain at their new position once the needles are withdrawn. This needling action interlocks fibers and holds the structure together by inter fiber friction forces caused by compression of the web, thereby bonding the web. By displacing a sufficient number of fibers in the web, the web is converted into a nonwoven fabric.
- In certain embodiments, the nonwoven web is made by a fleece carding process with point bonding. The point bonding (e.g., using a calendar) should be limited to a relatively small portion of the surface area of the nonwoven web to maintain good porosity in the web for migration of water-soluble components through the web during oral use. In certain embodiments, the point bonding is limited to less than about 60% of the surface area of the nonwoven web (or resulting pouch), such as less than about 50%, less than about 30%, or less than about 20% (e.g., about 1% to about 50%, about 5% to about 40%, or about 10% to about 30%). An advantage of point bonding is the ability to control the porosity, flexibility and fabric strength.
- In other embodiments, the nonwoven web can be subjected to hydroentangling. The term “hydroentangled” or “spunlaced” as applied to a nonwoven fabric herein defines a web subjected to impingement by a curtain of high speed, fine water jets, typically emanating from a nozzle jet strip accommodated in a pressure vessel often referred to as a manifold or an injector. This hydroentangled fabric can be characterized by reoriented, twisted, turned and entangled fibers. For example, the fibers can be hydroentangled by exposing the nonwoven web to water pressure from one or more hydroentangling manifolds at a water pressure in the range of about 10 bar to about 1000 bar. As compared to point bonding, spunlace technology, in certain embodiments, will have less impact on porosity of the web and, thus, may enhance flavor transfer through the nonwoven pouch material.
- In various embodiments, the nonwoven web can be subjected to a second bonding method in order to reduce elongation of the web during processing. In certain embodiments, nonwoven webs of the present disclosure can exhibit significant elongation during high speed processing on pouching equipment. Too much elongation of the nonwoven web can cause the web to shrink during processing, such that the final product is not sized appropriately. As such, it can be necessary to modify process equipment to fit a wider roll of fleece, for example, to compensate for any shrinkage in the final product due to elongation.
- In order to avoid or at least reduce such an elongation problem, in various embodiments the nonwoven web can be point bonded after the first bonding (e.g., hydroentangling) is completed. A second bonding process can increase the tensile strength of the nonwoven web and reduce elongation characteristics. In particular, a point bonding process can bond a nonwoven web by partially or completely melting the web (e.g., the heat sealable binder material) at discrete points. For example, in some embodiments, the nonwoven web can be subjected to ultrasonic bonding after initial bonding of the web. Any ultrasonic bonding system for nonwoven materials known in the art can be used to ultrasonically bond the nonwoven web. See, for example, the apparatuses and devices disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 8,096,339 to Aust and 8,557,071 to Weiler, incorporated by reference herein. In some embodiments, the nonwoven web can be subjected to point bonding via embossed and/or engraved calendar rolls, which are typically heated. See, e.g., the point bonding methods incorporating the use of very high calendar pressures and embossing techniques discussed in U.S. Pat. Publ. No. 2008/0249492 to Schmidt, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. The point bonding process is typically limited to less than about 60% of the surface area of the nonwoven web as noted above.
- In certain embodiments, the processing techniques used to blend, entangle and bond the nonwoven web can also impart a desired texture to the fibrous nonwoven web material. For instance, point bonding or hydroentangling can impart a desired texture (e.g. a desired pattern) to the nonwoven web. This textured pattern can include product identifying information. In some embodiments, the product identifying information is selected from the group consisting of product brand, a company name, a corporate logo, a corporate brand, a marketing message, product strength, active ingredient, product manufacture date, product expiration date, product flavor, product release profile, weight, product code (e.g., batch code), other product differentiating markings, and combinations thereof.
- Various manufacturing apparatuses and methods can be used to create a pouched product described herein. For example, US Publication No. 2012/0055493 to Novak, III et al., incorporated by reference in its entirety, relates to an apparatus and process for providing pouch material formed into a tube for use in the manufacture of smokeless tobacco products. The pouch material can include a binder material according to the present disclosure (e.g., a binder material comprising an aliphatic polyester). Similar apparatuses that incorporate equipment for supplying a continuous supply of a pouch material (e.g., a pouch processing unit adapted to supply a pouch material to a continuous tube forming unit for forming a continuous tubular member from the pouch material) can be used to create a pouched product described herein. Representative equipment for forming such a continuous tube of pouch material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0101588 to Boldrini et al., which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The apparatus further includes equipment for supplying pouched material to the continuous tubular member such that, when the continuous tubular member is subdivided and sealed into discrete pouch portions, each pouch portion includes a charge of a composition adapted for oral use. Representative equipment for supplying the filler material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0018539 to Brinkley, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some instances, the apparatus may include a subdividing unit for subdividing the continuous tubular member into individual pouch portions and, once subdivided into the individual pouch portions, may also include a sealing unit for sealing at least one of the ends of each pouch portion. In other instances, the continuous tubular member may be sealed into individual pouch portions with a sealing unit and then, once the individual pouch portions are sealed, the continuous tubular member may be subdivided into discrete individual pouch portions by a subdividing unit subdividing the continuous tubular member between the sealed ends of serially-disposed pouch portions. Still in other instances, sealing (closing) of the individual pouch portions of the continuous tubular member may occur substantially concurrently with the subdivision thereof, using a closing and dividing unit.
- An example apparatus for manufacturing an oral pouch product is illustrated in FIGS. 1-5 of U.S. Publication No. 2012/0055493 to Novak, III et al.; however, this apparatus is used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation. It should also be appreciated that the following manufacturing process and related equipment is not limited to the process order described below. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, an apparatus similar to that described in U.S. Publication No. 2012/0055493 can be configured to removably receive a first bobbin on an unwind spindle assembly, the first bobbin having a continuous length of a material, such as a pouch material, wound thereon. When the first bobbin is engaged with the apparatus, the pouch material can be routed from the first bobbin to a forming unit configured to form a continuous supply of the pouch material into a continuous tubular member defining a longitudinal axis.
- As such, as the pouch material is unwound from the first bobbin, the pouch material can be directed around an arrangement of roller members, otherwise referred to herein as a dancer assembly. A forming unit can be configured to cooperate with the first bobbin and the dancer assembly to take up slack in the pouch material and to maintain a certain amount of longitudinal tension on the pouch material as the pouch material is unwound from the first bobbin and fed to the forming unit, for example, by a drive system. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that, between the first bobbin and the forming unit, the pouch material can be supported, routed, and/or guided by a suitably aligned series of any number of, for example, idler rollers, guideposts, air bars, turning bars, guides, tracks, tunnels, or the like, for directing the pouch material along the desired path. Typical bobbins used by conventional automated pouch making apparatuses often contain a continuous strip of pouch material of which the length may vary. As such, the apparatus described herein can be configured so as to handle bobbins of that type and size.
- The forming unit can include one or more roller members configured to direct the pouch material about a hollow shaft such that the continuous supply of the pouch material can be formed into a continuous tubular member. The forming unit can include a sealing device configured to seal, fix, or otherwise engage lateral edges of the pouch material to form a longitudinally-extending seam, thereby forming a longitudinally-extending continuous tubular member. In various embodiments, an insertion unit can be configured to introduce charges of the composition adapted for oral use into the continuous tubular member through the hollow shaft. The insertion unit may be directly or indirectly engaged with the hollow shaft.
- A leading edge or end (also referred to as a laterally-extending seam) of the continuous tubular member can be closed/sealed such that a charge of composition adapted for oral use inserted by the insertion unit, is contained within the continuous tubular member proximate to the leading end. The leading end can be closed/sealed via a closing and dividing unit configured to close/seal a first portion of the continuous tubular member to form the closed leading end of a pouch member portion. The closing and dividing unit can also be configured to form a closed trailing edge or end of a previous pouch member portion. In this regard, the closing and dividing unit can also be configured to close a second portion of the continuous tubular member to form the closed trailing end of the pouch member portion. In this regard, the closing and dividing unit can close the ends, by heat-sealing, or other suitable sealing mechanism.
- As illustrated in FIGS. 20-22 of U.S. Publication No. 2012/0055493 to Novak, III et al., the closing and dividing unit can be configured to divide the continuous tubular member, between the closed trailing end and the closed leading end of serially-disposed pouch member portions, along the longitudinal axis of the continuous tubular member, and into a plurality of discrete pouch member portions such that each discrete pouch member portion includes a portion of the oral composition from the insertion unit. In this regard, the closing and dividing unit can include a blade, heated wire, or other cutting arrangement for severing the continuous tubular member into discrete pouch member portions. For example, the closing and dividing unit can include first and second arm members configured to interact to close and divide the continuous tubular member.
- In operation, a charge of the composition adapted for oral use (i.e., an amount suitable for an individual pouch member portion) can be supplied to the pouch member portion by an insertion unit after a leading end has been closed, but prior to the closing of a trailing end. In various embodiments, after receiving the charge of the oral composition, the discrete individual pouch member portion can be formed by closing the trailing end and severing the closed pouch member portion from the continuous tubular member such that an individual pouched product is formed.
- The amount of material contained within each pouch may vary. In various embodiments, the weight of the mixture within each pouch is at least about 50 mg, for example, from about 50 mg to about 2 grams, from about 100 mg to about 1.5 grams, or from about 200 mg to about 700 mg. In certain smaller embodiments, the dry weight of the material within each pouch is at least about 50 mg to about 150 mg. For some larger embodiment, the dry weight of the material within each pouch preferably does not exceed about 300 mg to about 500 mg. In some embodiments, each pouch/container may have disposed therein a flavor agent member, as described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al., which is incorporated herein by reference. For example, at least one flavored strip, piece or sheet of flavored water dispersible or water soluble material (e.g., a breath-freshening edible film type of material) may be disposed within each pouch along with or without at least one capsule. Such strips or sheets may be folded or crumpled in order to be readily incorporated within the pouch. See, for example, the types of materials and technologies set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,887,307 to Scott et al. and 6,923,981 to Leung et al.; and The EFSA Journal (2004) 85, 1-32; which are incorporated herein by reference. It is noted that fill volume in some embodiments is about 75% to about 100%.
- In various embodiments, the nonwoven web can be sufficiently tacky so as to create issues with high-speed pouching equipment. Therefore, in certain embodiments, a Teflon coating, or similar material, can be applied to one or more surfaces of the pouching equipment that touch the nonwoven web such as, for example, rollers, cutting instruments, and heat sealing devices in order to reduce and/or alleviate any problems associated with the pouch material sticking to the pouching equipment during processing.
- The pouched products can further include product identifying information printed or dyed on the outer water-permeable pouch or imprinted (e.g., embossed, debossed, or otherwise pressed) on the outer water-permeable pouch, such as described in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0255452 to Reddick et al., filed Mar. 11, 2013, which is incorporated by reference herein. As noted above, flavorants can also be incorporated into the nonwoven web if desired, such as by coating or printing an edible flavorant ink onto the nonwoven web. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos. 2012/0085360 to Kawata et al. and 2012/0103353 to Sebastian et al., each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
- The disclosed pouched products can be provided in a range of sizes. In some embodiments, a largest dimension (length, e.g., shown in the example of
FIG. 1 as “L”) is about 16 to about 40 mm or about 20 to about 40 mm, e.g., about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, about 20 mm, about 21 mm, about 22 mm, about 23 mm, about 24 mm, about 25 mm, about 26 mm, about 27 mm, about 28 mm, about 29 mm, 30 mm, about 31 mm, about 32 mm, about 33 mm, about 34 mm, about 35 mm, about 36 mm, about 37 mm, about 38 mm, about 39 mm, or about 40 mm. In some embodiments, the largest perpendicular dimension to the length (width, shown in the example ofFIG. 1 as “W”) is about 8 to about 20 mm or about 10 to about 20 mm, e.g., about 8 mm, about 9 mm, about 10 mm, about 11 mm, about 12 mm, about 13 mm, about 14 mm, about 15 mm, about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, or about 20 mm. Certain non-limiting embodiments have rough largest dimensions of about 38 mm (length)×about 18 mm (width); about 37.5 mm (length)×about 12 mm (width); about 38 mm (length)×about 12 mm (length); about 33 mm (length)×about 18 mm (width); about 33 mm (length)×about 12 mm (length), about 31 mm (length)×about 12 mm (width), about 30 mm (length)×about 12 mm (width), about 29 mm (length)×about 14 mm (width), about 28 mm (length)×about 13 mm (width), about 28 mm (length)×about 12 mm (width), about 27 mm (length)×about 16 mm (width), about 24 mm (length)×about 12 mm (width) and about 22 mm (length)×about 13 mm (width). The third dimension (thickness, T, not shown inFIG. 1 ), understood to represent the 3-dimensional thickness of the products, can vary. In some embodiments, the thickness can vary, e.g., from about 1 mm to about 20 mm or about 2 mm to about 10 mm, although the disclosure is not limited thereto. Certain examples of thicknesses include, e.g., about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 7 mm, about 8 mm, about 9 mm, about 10 mm, about 11 mm, about 12 mm, about 13 mm, about 14 mm, about 15 mm, about 16 mm, about 17 mm, about 18 mm, about 19 mm, or about 20 mm at the pouch's thickest point. In some embodiments, the total length, width, and thickness of the pouched product is about 130 mm or less, about 120 mm or less, about 110 mm or less, about 100 mm or less, about 90 mm or less, about 80 mm or less, about 70 mm or less, about 60 mm or less, about 50 mm or less, or about 40 mm or less, e.g., about 30 mm to about 130 mm, about 30 mm to about 100 mm, about 50 to about 100 mm, or about 50 to about 70 mm. Advantageously, in such embodiments, the thickness of such pouched products is about 8 mm or less. Surface area of certain pouches (defined as length times width×2) is about 900 mm2 or less, about 800 mm2 or less, about 700 mm2 or less, about 600 mm2 or less, about 500 mm2 or less, about 400 mm2 or less, about 300 mm2 or less, about 250 mm2 or less, about 200 mm2 or less, or about 150 mm2 or less (e.g., with a minimum of about 100 mm2 in some embodiments). - In some embodiments, the disclosed pouches have a length L of about 35 to about 60 mm and a width W of about 8 to about 18 mm. Certain, non-limiting examples of pouches provided herein are as follows: a pouch with L≥35 mm and W≥8 mm, a pouch with L≥35 mm and W≥10 mm, a pouch with L≥35 mm and W≥12 mm, a pouch with L≥35 mm and W≥14 mm, a pouch with L≥35 mm and W≥16 mm, a pouch with L≥40 mm and W≥8 mm, a pouch with L≥40 mm and W≥10 mm, a pouch with L≥40 mm and W≥12 mm, a pouch with L≥40 mm and W≥14 mm, a pouch with L≥40 mm and W≥16 mm, a pouch with L≥50 mm and W≥8 mm, a pouch with L≥50 mm and W≥10 mm, a pouch with L≥50 mm and W≥12 mm, a pouch with L≥50 mm and W≥14 mm, and a pouch with L≥50 mm and W≥16 mm. Certain advantageous ranges of length and width of large pouches are, in some embodiments, a length L of about 35 mm to about 60 mm, such as about 40 mm to about 60 mm, about 50 mm to about 60 mm, about 35 mm to about 50 mm, and about 35 mm to about 40 mm, and a width W of about 8 mm to about 16 mm, such as about 8 mm to about 14 mm, about 8 mm to about 12 mm, about 8 mm to about 10 mm, about 9 mm to about 16 mm, about 9 mm to about 14 mm, about 9 mm to about 12 mm, about 9 mm to about 10 mm, about 10 mm to about 16 mm, about 10 mm to about 14 mm, about 10 mm to about 12 mm, or about 14 to about 16. In various embodiments, the total measurements for the length, width, and thickness (i.e., adding all four sides of the pouch, plus the thickness) are within the following ranges. In some embodiments, the total length, width, and thickness of a large pouch as provided herein is about 90 mm or greater, about 100 mm or greater, about 110 mm or greater, about 120 mm or greater, about 130 mm or greater, about 140 mm or greater, or about 150 mm or greater. Advantageously, in such embodiments, the thickness of such pouches is about 2 mm or greater (e.g., between about 2 and about 8 mm). Surface area of certain pouches (defined as length times width×2) is about 300 mm2 or greater, about 400 mm2 or greater, about 500 mm2 or greater, about 600 mm2 or greater, or about 700 mm2 or greater (e.g., with a maximum of about 1000 mm2), although the disclosure is not limited thereto.
- A pouched product as described herein can be packaged within any suitable inner packaging material and/or outer container. See also, for example, the various types of containers for smokeless types of products that are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 7,014,039 to Henson et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,537,110 to Kutsch et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 7,584,843 to Kutsch et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 8,397,945 to Gelardi et al., D592,956 to Thiellier; D594,154 to Patel et al.; and D625,178 to Bailey et al.; US Pat. Pub. Nos. 2008/0173317 to Robinson et al.; 2009/0014343 to Clark et al.; 2009/0014450 to Bjorkholm; 2009/0250360 to Bellamah et al.; 2009/0266837 to Gelardi et al.; 2009/0223989 to Gelardi; 2009/0230003 to Thiellier; 2010/0084424 to Gelardi; and 2010/0133140 to Bailey et al; 2010/0264157 to Bailey et al.; and 2011/0168712 to Bailey et al. which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Products of the present disclosure configured for oral use may be packaged and stored in any suitable packaging in much the same manner that conventional types of smokeless tobacco products are packaged and stored. For example, a plurality of packets or pouches may be contained in a cylindrical container. The storage period of the product after preparation may vary. As used herein, “storage period” refers to the period of time after the preparation of the disclosed product. In some embodiments, one or more of the characteristics of the products disclosed herein (e.g., retention of whiteness, lack of color change, retention of volatile flavor components) is exhibited over some or all of the storage period. In some embodiments, the storage period (i.e., the time period after preparation) is at least one day. In some embodiments, the storage period is from about 1 day, about 2 days, or about 3 days, to about 1 week, or from about 1 week to about 2 weeks, from about 2 weeks to about 1 month, from about 1 month to about 2 months, from about 2 months to about 3 months, from about 3 months to about 4 months, or from about 4 months to about 5 months. In some embodiments, the storage period is any number of days between about 1 and about 150. In certain embodiments, the storage period may be longer than 5 months, for example, at least about 6 months, at least about 7 months, at least about 8 months, at least about 9 months, at least about 10 months, at least about 11 months, or at least about 12 months.
- Several compositions and corresponding nonwoven pouched products were produced, according to the following Examples.
- A first series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components (along with corresponding comparative pouches, with only one nicotine component, i.e., no nicotine-polymer complex). The composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 1 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch). Entries indicated as “Control” are comparative samples that contain no nicotine polacrilex, and entries indicated as “Sample” contain both nicotine and nicotine polacrilex (as well as NaOH).
- The components, with the exception of the last entry (water), were combined as follows: a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex (where included) was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, sweetener (acesulfame-K or sucralose), and ammonium chloride (where included). For the samples only (and not the controls), while mixing, 5M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. pH and moisture values (provided via a moisture analyzer device) are provided in the table for this composition prior to pouching. About 500-1000 mg of the mixture (depending, e.g., on the size of the pouch) was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (far right entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of 48%-50%.
-
TABLE 1 Sodium Nicotine Aqueous hydroxide Ace- Pola- 12% (5M Sodium sulfame MCC NaCl crilex nicotine aqueous bi- K Ammonium Water (filler) (salt) (20%) Water solution soultion) carbonate Xylitol (Sweetener) Chloride Flavorant Addition Control A (pouched product w/ dimensions 33 × 18, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 40-50 2-8 — 1-5 10-15 — 0-2 1-4 0-1 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.8, moisture before water addition = 26-27 Sample A (pouched product w/ dimensions 33 × 18, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 2-5 1-5 5-10 3-6 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 25-27 Control B (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 — — 15-20 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.8, moisture before water addition = 28-30 Sample B (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 30-40 2-8 2-5 1-5 10-15 5-10 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 28-29 Control C (pouched product with dimensions 33 × 18, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 — 1-5 10-15 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 9.2-9.3, moisture before water addition = 24-26 Sample C (pouched product with dimensions 33 × 18, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 2-5 1-5 5-10 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 24-25 Control D (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 — — 15-20 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 9.3-9.4, moisture before water addition = 28-29 Sample D (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 2-5 1-5 10-15 5-10 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 25-26 Control E (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 40-50 2-8 — 1-5 10-15 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.8, moisture before water addition = 26-27 Sample E (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 2-5 1-5 5-10 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 24-26 Control F (pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 40-50 2-8 — — 15-20 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 26-28 Sample F (pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 2-5 0.5-2.5 10-15 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.8, moisture before water addition = 26-28 Control G (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 — 1-5 10-15 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH =9.2-9.3, moisture before water addition = 25-26 Sample G (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 2-5 1-5 5-10 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 24-25 Control H (pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 40-50 2-8 — — 15-20 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 9.3-9.4, moisture before water addition = 26-27 (Sample H pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 35-45 2-8 2-5 1-5 10-15 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-35 pH = 8.8-8.9, moisture before water addition = 28-29 Control I (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 40-50 2-8 — 1-5 10-15 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 30-35 pH = 9.3-9.4, moisture before water addition = 25-26 Sample I (pouched product with dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 40-50 2-8 2-5 1-5 5-10 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.8, moisture before water addition = 22-24 Control J (pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 40-50 2-8 — — 15-20 — 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 30-35 pH = 9.4-9.5, moisture before water addition = 26-27 Sample J (pouched product with dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 40-50 2-8 2-5 1.5 10-15 1-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 30-35 pH = 8.7-8.9, moisture before water addition = 26-28 - A second series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components. The composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 2 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- The components, with the exception of the last entry (water), were combined as follows: a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, sweetener (acesulfame-K or sucralose), and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 5M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-600 mg of the mixture (depending, e.g., on the size of the pouch) was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of 32%.
-
TABLE 2 Sodium Ace- Nicotine Aqueous hydroxide sulfame Pola- 12% (5M Sodium K of MCC NaCl crilex nicotine aqueous bi- Sucralose Ammonium Water (filler) (salt) (20%) Water solution soultion) carbonate Xylitol (Sweetener) Chloride Flavorant Addition Sample K (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 15 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 50-60 2-8 2-5 — 10-15 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 15-20 Sample L (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 50-60 2-8 2-5 — 5-10 3-6 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 20-25 Sample N (pouched product w/ dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 50-60 2-5 2-5 — 10-15 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0-1 0.5-2.5 15-20 Sample N (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 50-60 2-5 2-5 — 5-10 2-5 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 20-25 Sample O (pouched product w/ dimensions 30 × 12, 10 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #3) Sweetener = sucralose in place of Acesulfame K 50-60 2-5 2-5 — 10-15 3-6 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.1-0.5 15-20 - A third series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components. The composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 3 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- The components, with the exception of the last entry (water), were combined as follows: a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, sweetener (acesulfame-K or sucralose), and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 5M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-500 mg of the mixture was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of about 45-50%.
-
TABLE 3 Sodium Nicotine hydroxide Ace- Pola- (5M Sodium sulfame MCC NaCl crilex aqueous bi- K Ammonium Water (filler) (salt) (20%) Water Nicotine soultion) carbonate Xylitol (Sweetener) Chloride Flavorant Addition Sample P (pouched product w/dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2) 35-45 2-8 2-5 10-15 1-2 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 25-35 Sample Q (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 2-5 10-15 1-2 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 25-35 Sample R (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #4) 35-45 2-8 2-5 10-15 1-2 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 25-35 Sample S (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 17 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #5) 35-45 2-8 4-8 8-12 1-2 8-12 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 25-35 Sample T (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 17 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 4-8 8-12 1-2 8-12 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 25-35 - A fourth series of pouches was prepared with two nicotine components. The composition of the mixture within each pouch is provided in Table 4 below (with all values provided in weight percentages based on the total weight of the mixture, including the additional water sprayed on during pouching, but excluding the weight of the outer pouch).
- The components, with the exception of the last entry (water), were combined as follows: a mixture of MCC, NaCl, and nicotine polacrilex was combined with a liquid pre-mix comprising the aqueous nicotine solution, flavorant, sodium bicarbonate, xylitol, acesulfame-K, and ammonium chloride (where used). While mixing, 6M sodium hydroxide was added to the mixture. About 400-500 mg of the mixture was placed within a non-woven fleece pouch. The pouch was then sprayed with additional water (last entry in the table) during or after pouching to a total moisture content of about 45-50%.
-
TABLE 4 Sodium Nicotine hydroxide Ace- Pola- (6M Sodium sulfame MCC NaCl crilex aqueous bi- K Ammonium Water (filler) (salt) (20%) Water Nicotine soultion) carbonate Xylitol (Sweetener) Chloride Flavorant Addition Sample U (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #2 & #6) 35-45 2-8 2-5 8-15 1-2 3-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 — 0.5-2.5 30-40 Sample V (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 2-5 8-15 1-2 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 30-40 Sample W (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 14 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #4) 35-45 2-8 2-5 8-15 1-2 4-8 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 30-40 Sample X (pouched product w/ dimensions 38 × 12, 17 mg nicotine per pouch, Flavorant #1) 35-45 2-8 4-8 4-8 1-2 6-10 0-2 1-4 0-2 0.1-0.5 0.5-2.5 30-40 - The use of sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide for pH adjustment reagents is compared. Solutions of nicotine polacrilex in water were evaluated for nicotine release in the presence of either sodium or calcium hydroxide at several pH values. Nicotine polacrilex (20% by weight of nicotine) was added to 500 mL of water containing various amounts of either sodium hydroxide or calcium hydroxide and stirred for 10 minutes to provide aqueous solutions calculated to theoretically contain 400 parts per million (ppm) of nicotine, calculated as the free base, and 100% release of theoretical nicotine from the resin. For each of the foregoing solutions, a 1 mL aliquot was analyzed for nicotine concentration as well as pH. The results are provided in
FIG. 2 , which depicts nicotine release from nicotine polacrilex in aqueous solution using sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide.FIG. 2 shows that calcium hydroxide can effectively raise the pH of the solution and at lower pH values, enhance the release of nicotine relative to a solution of sodium hydroxide at the same pH value. This data encompasses a resulting pH range of about 3.96 to about 7.92. - Aqueous solutions of various sodium and calcium salts in combination with nicotine polacrilex (20% nicotine by weight) were prepared by stirring components for 10 minutes. 1 mL aliquots were taken and analyzed for nicotine concentration. The amount of each respective salt included in each solution was varied to provide a range of calculated ionic strengths for each salt/nicotine polacrilex solution, and varied between about 1 and about 300 millimoles per liter. A chart of the nicotine release versus ionic strength for such samples is provided in
FIG. 3 . - Formulations comprising nicotine polacrilex (20% nicotine by weight), alone and in the presence of various salts and combinations thereof were prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided to Table 5. Aqueous solutions were prepared by stirring the components for 10 minutes, and then 1 mL aliquots were taken and analyzed for nicotine concentration.
-
TABLE 5 Nicotine Polacrilex/Salt Samples Nicotine polacrilex Example (grams) Salt (grams) Powder A 1 Powder B 1 Sodium chloride (0.5) Powder C 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4) Powder D 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4), Calcium glycerolphosphate (0.6) Powder E 1 Sodium chloride (0.5), Sodium benzoate (0.4), Calcium glycerolphosphate (1.2) - Nicotine polacrilex alone in aqueous solution (i.e., without any salts present, Powder A) was found to release only about 4.4% of the available nicotine, and the pH of the solution was about 7.75. In contrast, addition of salts to the water during dissolution enhanced release of the nicotine from the polacrilex resin and also lowered the pH of the resulting solutions. A chart of the nicotine release versus ionic strength for each powder is provided as
FIG. 4 . With reference toFIG. 4 , nicotine release increased with increasing ionic strength. Overall, the solutions including calcium chloride or calcium lactate gluconate (Example Powders D and E) provided the greatest nicotine release, with greater release of nicotine from nicotine polacrilex than is achievable by pH adjustment alone (shown within the region surrounded by a dotted line). For example, 60% of greater release of nicotine was observed when bound to polacrilex with a multivalent cation salt such as calcium lactate gluconate (1:1). The pH of the various solutions ranged from about 3.96 to about 7.92 (data not shown) - The amount of each respective salt included in each solution was varied to provide a range of calculated ionic strengths for each salt/nicotine polacrilex solution, and varied between about 1 and about 300 millimoles per liter.
- Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and various salts (Pouches AA, AB, AC, and AD) were prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. For each pouch, about 462 mg of the corresponding composition was used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch was sprayed with water to provide the desired moisture content. The final pouch weight for each pouch was about 700 mg.
-
TABLE 6 Composition of Fill A (Reference, used for Pouch AA) Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 48-72 Sodium chloride 4-6 Nicotine polacrilex (20% 6-8 nicotine by weight) Water 10-12 Sweetener 2-4 Flavor 2-4 pH adjuster (5M sodium 11-13 hydroxide) -
TABLE 7 Composition of Fill B (used for Pouch AB) Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 48-72 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex 6-8 Water 17-25 Propylene glycol 1-2 Sweetener 2-4 Flavor 1-3 Sodium benzoate 2.2-3.2 -
TABLE 8 Composition of Fill C (used for Pouch AC) Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 39-57 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex 6-8 Water 19-27 Propylene glycol 1-2 sweetener 2.5-4.5 Flavor 1-3 Sodium benzoate 2.2-3.2 Calcium glycerophosphate 7-11 -
TABLE 9 Composition of Fill D (used for Pouch AD) Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 43-63 Nicotine polacrilex 6-8 Calcium hydroxide 0.4-0.6 Calcium lactate 0.4-0.6 Calcium gluconate 0.6-0.8 Sodium chloride 2-3 Sodium benzoate 6-8 Water 17-25 Propylene glycol 1-2 Sweetener 0.4-0.6 Flavor 3-4 - Nicotine release from the pouched products comprising the nicotine polacrilex/salt-containing formulations provided in Tables 6-9 was evaluated (with no pH adjustment), as shown in
FIG. 5 . Each of the pouches was cut open and added to complete artificial saliva (“CAS”) (1 mL CAS per 300 mg sample). Each solution was then placed on a heated rotary shaker set at 250 rpm for about 2 hours and held at a temperature of 37° C. An aliquot of each solution was removed and analyzed for nicotine concentration. Percent release of nicotine was calculated as the ratio of nicotine analyzed versus theoretical nicotine present. Log D and pH were determined for pouches AA, AB, AC, and AD (See Table 10). - Pouch AD uses calcium lactate gluconate as a nicotine release enhancing agent and also contains sodium benzoate (believed to be capable of leading to in situ formation of a nicotine ion pair); pouch AD displays a positive logD value. Pouch AC uses calcium glycerolphosphate as a nicotine release enhancing agent and enhances the release of nicotine, although the logP of pouch AC is less preferred than that of pouch AD. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that pouch AC may have a lower log D than AD due to the lower water solubility of calcium glycerolphosphate versus calcium lactate gluconate (1:1) and/or higher application amount of the calcium glycerolphosphate versus calcium lactate gluconate (1:1), leading to possible interference in nicotine ion pair formation.
-
TABLE 10 Results for pH, logD, and % nicotine release- pouched product examples Example # pH LogD % nicotine release Pouch AA 8.43 0.58 75 Pouch AB 5.75 −0.19 44 Pouch AC 5.77 −0.65 67 Pouch AD 5.29 0.21 69 -
FIG. 5 also provides results for nicotine release versus pH of the test solution for certain powder compositions. Powders B and C from Table 5 were each separately added to 500 milliliters of deionized water in an amount sufficient to provide a solution calculated to theoretically contain 400 ppm nicotine (calculated as the free base and 100% release of theoretical nicotine). Each solution was stirred for 10 minutes, and then a one milliliter aliquot of each solution was removed and analyzed for nicotine concentration. Each solution was pH adjusted to provide a range of pH values from about 7 to 12 using either 1M NaOH (for pH ranges 7-9) or 5M NaOH (pH values of about 11-12). Percent release of nicotine was calculated as the ratio of nicotine analyzed versus theoretical quantity of nicotine present. - It was observed that the pouched composition examples comprising a calcium salt (Pouches AC and AD) provided improved nicotine release (˜70%) at acidic pH (e.g., about 6) relative to the compositions of Pouches AA and AB and the powder compositions which contained either nicotine polacrilex and sodium chloride alone (Powder B) or nicotine polacrilex, sodium chloride, and sodium benzoate (Powder C). The calcium salts were found to effectively raise the pH of the solution and at lower pH values, enhance the release of nicotine relative to a solution of sodium hydroxide at the same pH value. Notably, nicotine release from the compositions of Powders B and C was only about 40% at pH around 6.
- Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and nicotine along with various salts are prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 11 and 12. For each pouch, about 330 mg of the corresponding composition is used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch is sprayed with water to provide the desired moisture content. The final pouch weight for each pouch is about 500 mg. The expected pH of the pouch composition upon dissolution is in a range from about 5.5 to about 6.5, and the expected log D is positive.
-
TABLE 11 Composition of Fill E Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 40-60 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex (20% 4-6 nicotine by weight) Nicotine (aq. solution, 12% by 16-23 weight) Water 4-5 Benzoic acid 2-3 Sodium benzoate 5-7 Sweetener 2-4 Flavor 2-4 Calcium lactate 1-1.5 Calcium gluconate 1.5-2 -
TABLE 12 Composition of Fill F Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 34-50 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex (20% 4-6 nicotine by weight) Nicotine (aq. solution, 12% by 16-23 weight) Water 4-5 Benzoic acid 2-3 Sodium benzoate 11-17 sweetener 2-4 Flavor 2-4 Calcium lactate 1-1.5 Calcium gluconate 1.5-2 - Pouched products comprising nicotine polacrilex and nicotine along with either sodium hydroxide or calcium hydroxide as the pH adjusting agent (Pouches BA and BB respectively) are prepared using the ingredients and amounts provided in Tables 13 and 14. For each pouch, about 330-340 mg of the corresponding composition is used to fill a fleece pouch (viscose polyester blend fleece with an acrylate binder), and the pouch sprayed with water to a final weight of about 500 mg. Each pouch has dimensions of about 30×12 with 10 mg nicotine per pouch. The expected pH of the pouch composition is in a range from about 8.5 to about 9.0.
-
TABLE 13 Composition of Fill B1 Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 50-70 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex (20% 4-6 nicotine by weight) Nicotine (aq. solution, 12% by 16-21 weight) Water 1-3 Sodium hydroxide (5M) 5-7 Sodium bicarbonate 0.3-0.5 Sweetener (sucralose) 2-4 Flavor 2-4 -
TABLE 14 Composition of Fill B2 Component Inclusion in pouch (% by weight) Microcrystalline cellulose 50-70 Sodium chloride 3-4 Nicotine polacrilex (20% 4-6 nicotine by weight) Nicotine (aq. solution, 12% by 16-21 weight) Water 1-3 Calcium hydroxide 1-2 Sweetener (sucralose) 2-4 Flavor 2-4 - Many modifications and other embodiments of the invention will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which this invention pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description. Therefore, it is to be understood that the invention is not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.
Claims (22)
1. A pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, the pouched product having a total moisture content of about 5% or greater,
wherein the composition comprises a nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex.
2. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the total moisture content is about 15% or greater.
3. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the total moisture content is about 25% or greater.
4. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine component is the only nicotine component contained within the composition.
5. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine component is a first nicotine component and the composition further comprises a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt.
6. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises a polymeric cation exchange resin.
7. The pouched product of claim 6 , wherein the polymeric cation exchange resin comprises a polyacrylic polymer.
8. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
9. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is in the form of particles.
10. The pouched product claim 1 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is in the form of particles with an average particle size of about 200 microns to about 400 microns.
11. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex is in the form of particles that exhibit a bimodal particle size distribution and wherein the bimodal particle size distribution comprises a first mode with a peak at about 75 to about 125 micrometers or about 80 to about 110 micrometers and a second mode with a peak of about 500 to about 1000 micrometers or about 700 to about 1000 micrometers.
12. The pouched product of claim 9 , wherein the particles are uncoated.
13. The pouched product of claim 9 , wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising one or more filling components and/or one or more pH adjusters.
14. The pouched product of claim 13 , wherein the particles are coated with a coating comprising mannitol and sodium carbonate.
15. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the composition comprises a pH adjuster selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, and combinations thereof.
16. The pouched product of claim 1 , wherein the composition comprises a calcium salt selected from the group consisting of calcium benzoate, calcium gluconate, calcium glycerol phosphate, calcium lactate, calcium lactate gluconate, and any combination thereof.
17. A composition, comprising a first nicotine component in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex and a second nicotine component selected from the group consisting of nicotine and a nicotine salt,
wherein the composition is in the form of a pouched product.
18. The composition of claim 17 , wherein the first nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 2% to about 15% by weight and the second nicotine component is provided in an amount of about 0.5% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
19. The composition of claim 17 , wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a higher weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
20. The composition of claim 17 , wherein nicotine provided from the first nicotine component is present in a lower weight percentage than nicotine provided from the second nicotine component.
21. The composition of claim 17 , wherein the nicotine-polymer complex comprises nicotine polacrilex.
22. A method of providing a pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity and a composition adapted for oral use situated within the cavity, with a modified nicotine release profile, comprising:
incorporating nicotine in the form of a nicotine-polymer complex; and
incorporating water within and/or adding water to the pouched product to give a moist pouched product with a total moisture content of about 5% or greater.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/987,570 US20230148652A1 (en) | 2021-11-15 | 2022-11-15 | Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US202163279669P | 2021-11-15 | 2021-11-15 | |
US202263421473P | 2022-11-01 | 2022-11-01 | |
US17/987,570 US20230148652A1 (en) | 2021-11-15 | 2022-11-15 | Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20230148652A1 true US20230148652A1 (en) | 2023-05-18 |
Family
ID=84364044
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/987,570 Pending US20230148652A1 (en) | 2021-11-15 | 2022-11-15 | Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20230148652A1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP4432862A1 (en) |
CA (1) | CA3238151A1 (en) |
MX (1) | MX2024005868A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023084498A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
USD1049470S1 (en) * | 2021-05-05 | 2024-10-29 | Lucy Goods Inc. | Nicotine pouch |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DK202370065A1 (en) * | 2023-02-03 | 2024-08-07 | Fertin Pharma As | A pouched product |
Family Cites Families (166)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US787611A (en) | 1903-06-17 | 1905-04-18 | American Cigar Company | Treating tobacco. |
US1086306A (en) | 1912-11-11 | 1914-02-03 | Theodor Oelenheinz | Process of bleaching tobacco-leaves. |
US1437095A (en) | 1920-06-01 | 1922-11-28 | August Wasmuth | Process of bleaching tobacco |
US1757477A (en) | 1927-07-11 | 1930-05-06 | Rosenhoch Samuel | Process and device for ozonizing tobacco |
US2148147A (en) | 1933-12-30 | 1939-02-21 | Degussa | Process for bleaching tobacco |
US2033909A (en) | 1934-12-19 | 1936-03-17 | Niacet Chemicals Corp | Manufacture of calcium levulinate |
US2170107A (en) | 1935-01-28 | 1939-08-22 | Degussa | Process for bleaching tobacco |
US2274649A (en) | 1935-01-28 | 1942-03-03 | Degussa | Process for bleaching tobacco |
US2122421A (en) | 1937-07-30 | 1938-07-05 | Du Pont | Tobacco treatment |
US2770239A (en) | 1952-02-04 | 1956-11-13 | Prats Jose Romero | Process of treating tobacco |
US2822306A (en) | 1955-07-01 | 1958-02-04 | Plate Gmbh Dr | Aromatic and pleasant tasting de-nicotinized tobacco and method of producing same |
US3338992A (en) | 1959-12-15 | 1967-08-29 | Du Pont | Process for forming non-woven filamentary structures from fiber-forming synthetic organic polymers |
US3502763A (en) | 1962-02-03 | 1970-03-24 | Freudenberg Carl Kg | Process of producing non-woven fabric fleece |
US3341394A (en) | 1966-12-21 | 1967-09-12 | Du Pont | Sheets of randomly distributed continuous filaments |
US3542615A (en) | 1967-06-16 | 1970-11-24 | Monsanto Co | Process for producing a nylon non-woven fabric |
US3849241A (en) | 1968-12-23 | 1974-11-19 | Exxon Research Engineering Co | Non-woven mats by melt blowing |
DE2048006B2 (en) | 1969-10-01 | 1980-10-30 | Asahi Kasei Kogyo K.K., Osaka (Japan) | Method and device for producing a wide nonwoven web |
DE1950669C3 (en) | 1969-10-08 | 1982-05-13 | Metallgesellschaft Ag, 6000 Frankfurt | Process for the manufacture of nonwovens |
US3612065A (en) | 1970-03-09 | 1971-10-12 | Creative Enterprises Inc | Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof |
US3901248A (en) | 1970-07-22 | 1975-08-26 | Leo Ab | Chewable smoking substitute composition |
US4153063A (en) | 1970-09-02 | 1979-05-08 | Studiengesellschaft Kohle Mbh | Process for the extraction of nicotine from tobacco |
US3943945A (en) | 1971-09-20 | 1976-03-16 | Rosen Enterprises, Inc. | Process for preparation of reconstituted tobacco sheet |
US3889689A (en) | 1971-12-20 | 1975-06-17 | Rosen Enterprise Inc | Method of treating tobacco with catalase and hydrogen peroxide |
US3972759A (en) | 1972-06-29 | 1976-08-03 | Exxon Research And Engineering Company | Battery separators made from polymeric fibers |
US3851653A (en) | 1972-10-11 | 1974-12-03 | Rosen Enterprises Inc | Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof |
US3987185A (en) | 1973-11-12 | 1976-10-19 | Richardson-Merrell Inc. | Method of treatment using 1-oxo-1h-2-benzopyran-3-carboxylic acid derivatives |
US4340073A (en) | 1974-02-12 | 1982-07-20 | Philip Morris, Incorporated | Expanding tobacco |
US3943940A (en) | 1974-09-13 | 1976-03-16 | Isao Minami | Method of removing nicotine in smoking and a smoking filter to be used therefor |
US4034764A (en) | 1975-08-15 | 1977-07-12 | Philip Morris Incorporated | Smoking material and method for its preparation |
GB1550835A (en) | 1975-08-18 | 1979-08-22 | British American Tobacco Co | Treatment of tobacco |
US4194514A (en) | 1976-09-27 | 1980-03-25 | Stauffer Chemical Company | Removal of radioactive lead and polonium from tobacco |
IT1192247B (en) | 1978-02-24 | 1988-03-31 | Snia Viscosa | PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF COAGULABLE AND FILABLE CELLULOSE DERIVATIVES WITH CELLULOSE REGENERATION |
IT7821922A0 (en) | 1978-04-03 | 1978-04-03 | Ind Applic Viscosa Snia Viscos | PROCEDURE FOR THE DISSOLUTION OF CELLULOSE IN ORGANIC SOLVENTS, SOLUTIONS OBTAINED WITH THIS PROCEDURE, AND PROCEDURE FOR THE REGENERATION OF CELLULOSE FROM THE SAID SOLUTIONS WITH THE PRODUCTION OF FORMED BODIES. |
IT7826174A0 (en) | 1978-07-27 | 1978-07-27 | Snia Viscosa | PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF BODIES OF REGENERATED CELLULOSE FROM SOLUTIONS OF CELLULOSE DERIVATIVES IN DIMETHYL SULPHOXIDE. |
CA1141114A (en) | 1978-11-24 | 1983-02-15 | Masamichi Ishida | Regenerated cellulose hollow fiber and process for manufacturing same |
US4340563A (en) | 1980-05-05 | 1982-07-20 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Method for forming nonwoven webs |
US4366824A (en) | 1981-06-25 | 1983-01-04 | Philip Morris Incorporated | Process for expanding tobacco |
US4388933A (en) | 1981-06-25 | 1983-06-21 | Philip Morris, Inc. | Tobacco stem treatment and expanded tobacco product |
US4366823A (en) | 1981-06-25 | 1983-01-04 | Philip Morris, Incorporated | Process for expanding tobacco |
JPS5860010A (en) | 1981-10-01 | 1983-04-09 | Asahi Chem Ind Co Ltd | Hollow fiber and dialytic membrane consisting of said hollow fiber |
GB2122892B (en) | 1982-07-02 | 1986-01-29 | Squibb & Sons Inc | Nystantin pastille formulation |
US4660577A (en) | 1982-08-20 | 1987-04-28 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Dry pre-mix for moist snuff |
DE3344554A1 (en) | 1983-12-09 | 1985-06-20 | B.A.T. Cigaretten-Fabriken Gmbh, 2000 Hamburg | SMOKING PRODUCT CONTAINING NICOTIN-N 'OXIDE |
US4622259A (en) | 1985-08-08 | 1986-11-11 | Surgikos, Inc. | Nonwoven medical fabric |
US5668295A (en) | 1990-11-14 | 1997-09-16 | Philip Morris Incorporated | Protein involved in nicotine synthesis, DNA encoding, and use of sense and antisense DNAs corresponding thereto to affect nicotine content in transgenic tobacco cells and plants |
GB9125594D0 (en) | 1991-12-02 | 1992-01-29 | Courtaulds Plc | Purifying solutions |
US5259403A (en) | 1992-03-18 | 1993-11-09 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Process and apparatus for expanding tobacco cut filler |
US5387416A (en) | 1993-07-23 | 1995-02-07 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco composition |
DE4415999A1 (en) | 1994-05-06 | 1995-11-09 | Bolder Arzneimittel Gmbh | Gastric acid-binding chewing pastilles |
US5539093A (en) | 1994-06-16 | 1996-07-23 | Fitzmaurice; Wayne P. | DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in carotenoid biosynthesis |
US5637785A (en) | 1994-12-21 | 1997-06-10 | The Salk Institute For Biological Studies | Genetically modified plants having modulated flower development |
GR1002575B (en) | 1995-04-07 | 1997-02-06 | Apparatus for removing noxious substances from cigarets | |
NL1001692C2 (en) | 1995-11-20 | 1997-05-21 | Akzo Nobel Nv | Process for the preparation of regenerated cellulose filaments. |
US5705624A (en) | 1995-12-27 | 1998-01-06 | Fitzmaurice; Wayne Paul | DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in phytoene biosynthesis |
US5713376A (en) | 1996-05-13 | 1998-02-03 | Berger; Carl | Non-addictive tobacco products |
US5908032A (en) | 1996-08-09 | 1999-06-01 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Method of and apparatus for expanding tobacco |
US6596298B2 (en) | 1998-09-25 | 2003-07-22 | Warner-Lambert Company | Fast dissolving orally comsumable films |
US6805134B2 (en) | 1999-04-26 | 2004-10-19 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco processing |
WO2001007507A1 (en) | 1999-07-22 | 2001-02-01 | Warner-Lambert Company | Pullulan film compositions |
US6371126B1 (en) | 2000-03-03 | 2002-04-16 | Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation | Tobacco recovery system |
DE60121603T2 (en) | 2000-08-30 | 2007-06-21 | North Carolina State University | TRANSGENIC PLANTS CONTAINING MOLECULAR DECOYS THAT CHANGE THE PROTEIN CONTENT |
US7230160B2 (en) | 2001-03-08 | 2007-06-12 | Michigan State University | Lipid metabolism regulators in plants |
DK1383400T3 (en) | 2001-05-01 | 2008-07-07 | Regent Court Technologies Llc | Non-toxic tobacco product |
US6668839B2 (en) | 2001-05-01 | 2003-12-30 | Jonnie R. Williams | Smokeless tobacco product |
US7208659B2 (en) | 2001-05-02 | 2007-04-24 | Conopco Inc. | Process for increasing the flavonoid content of a plant and plants obtainable thereby |
US6730832B1 (en) | 2001-09-10 | 2004-05-04 | Luis Mayan Dominguez | High threonine producing lines of Nicotiana tobacum and methods for producing |
US6953040B2 (en) | 2001-09-28 | 2005-10-11 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company | Tobacco mint plant material product |
US7032601B2 (en) | 2001-09-28 | 2006-04-25 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company | Encapsulated materials |
US7025066B2 (en) | 2002-10-31 | 2006-04-11 | Jerry Wayne Lawson | Method of reducing the sucrose ester concentration of a tobacco mixture |
ES2285233T3 (en) | 2002-12-20 | 2007-11-16 | Niconovum Ab | A PARTICULATE MATERIAL THAT CONTAINS NICOTINE AND MICROCRYSTALLINE CELLULOSE PHYSICALLY AND CHEMICALLY STABLE. |
US7556047B2 (en) | 2003-03-20 | 2009-07-07 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Method of expanding tobacco using steam |
US7014039B2 (en) | 2003-06-19 | 2006-03-21 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Sliding shell package for smoking articles |
SE527350C8 (en) | 2003-08-18 | 2006-03-21 | Gallaher Snus Ab | Lid for snuff box |
JP4824571B2 (en) | 2003-11-03 | 2011-11-30 | ユーエス スモークレス タバコ カンパニー リミテッド ライアビリティ カンパニー | Flavored smokeless tobacco and manufacturing method |
EP1691631A4 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2012-09-05 | Us Smokeless Tobacco Co | Tobacco compositions |
US8627828B2 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2014-01-14 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Llc | Tobacco compositions |
AU2004308498A1 (en) | 2003-12-22 | 2005-07-14 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company | Conditioning process for tobacco and/or snuff compositions |
EP1765309B1 (en) | 2004-07-02 | 2009-08-05 | Radi Medical Biodegradable AB | Smokeless toabacco product |
US7798153B2 (en) | 2004-08-23 | 2010-09-21 | Us Smokeless Tobacco Co. | Nicotiana Kawakamii smokeless tobacco |
US7650891B1 (en) | 2004-09-03 | 2010-01-26 | Rosswil Llc Ltd. | Tobacco precursor product |
US7537110B2 (en) | 2005-06-02 | 2009-05-26 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Container for consumer article |
US7584843B2 (en) | 2005-07-18 | 2009-09-08 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Pocket-size hand-held container for consumer items |
US7861728B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2011-01-04 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco composition having an outer and inner pouch |
US20070062549A1 (en) | 2005-09-22 | 2007-03-22 | Holton Darrell E Jr | Smokeless tobacco composition |
US7819124B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2010-10-26 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company | Tobacco articles and methods |
US7810507B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2010-10-12 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco composition |
CA2646942C (en) | 2006-03-16 | 2014-07-29 | Niconovum Ab | Improved snuff composition |
US20080173317A1 (en) | 2006-08-01 | 2008-07-24 | John Howard Robinson | Smokeless tobacco |
US8251218B2 (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2012-08-28 | Meadwestvaco Corporation | Container with pivoting cover |
US7951264B2 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2011-05-31 | Georgia-Pacific Consumer Products Lp | Absorbent cellulosic products with regenerated cellulose formed in-situ |
US8168855B2 (en) | 2007-02-23 | 2012-05-01 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company | Tobacco compositions and methods of making |
ITBO20070197A1 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2008-09-21 | Azionaria Costruzioni Acma Spa | MACHINE FOR THE PRODUCTION OF BAGS OF UNCONTROL MATERIAL. |
US8186360B2 (en) | 2007-04-04 | 2012-05-29 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Cigarette comprising dark air-cured tobacco |
US8393465B2 (en) | 2007-05-07 | 2013-03-12 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Pocket-size hybrid container for consumer items |
US9004074B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2015-04-14 | Al-Farabi Kazakh National University | Method for extraction of nicotine from tobacco raw material |
WO2009004488A2 (en) | 2007-06-08 | 2009-01-08 | Philip Morris Products S.A. | Capsule clusters for oral consumption |
US8061362B2 (en) | 2007-07-23 | 2011-11-22 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco composition |
USD594154S1 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2009-06-09 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Container with bottom compartment |
US8336557B2 (en) | 2007-11-28 | 2012-12-25 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Smokeless compressed tobacco product for oral consumption |
US7878324B2 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2011-02-01 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Pocket-size container for consumer items |
US20090230003A1 (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2009-09-17 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Pocket-sized container |
USD592956S1 (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2009-05-26 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Container |
US8033425B2 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2011-10-11 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Dispensing container |
DE102008015851A1 (en) | 2008-03-27 | 2009-10-01 | Herrmann Ultraschalltechnik Gmbh & Co. Kg | Ultrasonic welding tool with fluid drive |
US7946450B2 (en) | 2008-04-25 | 2011-05-24 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Dispensing container |
US20100018539A1 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2010-01-28 | Paul Andrew Brinkley | Smokeless tobacco products and processes |
US9248935B2 (en) | 2008-12-01 | 2016-02-02 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Dual cavity sliding dispenser |
US9155772B2 (en) | 2008-12-08 | 2015-10-13 | Philip Morris Usa Inc. | Soft, chewable and orally dissolvable and/or disintegrable products |
US20120067361A1 (en) | 2009-04-03 | 2012-03-22 | X-International Aps | Plant fiber product and method for its manufacture |
USD625178S1 (en) | 2009-04-16 | 2010-10-12 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company, Inc. | Container with hinged insert |
US8087540B2 (en) | 2009-04-16 | 2012-01-03 | R.J. Reynolds Tabacco Company | Dispensing container for metered dispensing of product |
DE102009002675A1 (en) | 2009-04-27 | 2010-10-28 | Herrmann Ultraschalltechnik Gmbh & Co. Kg | Ultrasonic sealing device and method for sealing webs of material |
JP2012526553A (en) | 2009-05-11 | 2012-11-01 | ユーエス スモークレス タバコ カンパニー リミテッド ライアビリティ カンパニー | Method and device for flavoring smokeless tobacco |
US8944072B2 (en) | 2009-06-02 | 2015-02-03 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials |
US8991403B2 (en) | 2009-06-02 | 2015-03-31 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials |
US8434496B2 (en) | 2009-06-02 | 2013-05-07 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials |
JPWO2010147024A1 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2012-12-06 | 日本たばこ産業株式会社 | Oral tobacco products |
US20110139164A1 (en) | 2009-12-15 | 2011-06-16 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco Product And Method For Manufacture |
US8096411B2 (en) | 2010-01-12 | 2012-01-17 | R. J. Reynolds Tabacco Company | Dispensing container |
US8397945B2 (en) | 2010-02-23 | 2013-03-19 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Dispensing container |
US20110274628A1 (en) | 2010-05-07 | 2011-11-10 | Borschke August J | Nicotine-containing pharmaceutical compositions |
US11116237B2 (en) | 2010-08-11 | 2021-09-14 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Meltable smokeless tobacco composition |
US10028520B2 (en) | 2010-09-02 | 2018-07-24 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Apparatus for manufacturing a smokeless tobacco product incorporating an object, and associated method |
US9675102B2 (en) | 2010-09-07 | 2017-06-13 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco product comprising effervescent composition |
US8931493B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2015-01-13 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Co. | Smokeless tobacco products |
US9204667B2 (en) | 2010-12-01 | 2015-12-08 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco pastille and injection molding process for forming smokeless tobacco products |
US9775376B2 (en) | 2010-12-01 | 2017-10-03 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco pastille and moulding process for forming smokeless tobacco products |
US9084439B2 (en) | 2011-09-22 | 2015-07-21 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Translucent smokeless tobacco product |
US9474303B2 (en) | 2011-09-22 | 2016-10-25 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Translucent smokeless tobacco product |
US10881132B2 (en) | 2011-12-14 | 2021-01-05 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco product comprising effervescent composition |
US9420825B2 (en) | 2012-02-13 | 2016-08-23 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Whitened tobacco composition |
US9044035B2 (en) | 2012-04-17 | 2015-06-02 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Remelted ingestible products |
US9339058B2 (en) | 2012-04-19 | 2016-05-17 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Method for producing microcrystalline cellulose from tobacco and related tobacco product |
US9386800B2 (en) | 2012-09-21 | 2016-07-12 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Fibrous composite tobacco-containing materials |
US20140255452A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2014-09-11 | Niconovum Usa, Inc. | Method and apparatus for differentiating oral pouch products |
US11503853B2 (en) | 2013-09-09 | 2022-11-22 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco composition incorporating a botanical material |
US10357054B2 (en) | 2013-10-16 | 2019-07-23 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Smokeless tobacco pastille |
US9375033B2 (en) | 2014-02-14 | 2016-06-28 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco-containing gel composition |
SE538741C2 (en) | 2014-04-04 | 2016-11-08 | X-International Aps | tobacco Commodity |
US10508096B2 (en) | 2014-05-27 | 2019-12-17 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Nicotine salts, co-crystals, and salt co-crystal complexes |
US9896429B2 (en) | 2014-05-27 | 2018-02-20 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Nicotine salts, co-crystals, and salt co-crystal complexes |
EP3871515A1 (en) | 2014-05-27 | 2021-09-01 | R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Nicotine salts, co-crystals, and salt co-crystal complexes |
US11019840B2 (en) | 2014-07-02 | 2021-06-01 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Oral pouch products |
US20160073686A1 (en) | 2014-09-12 | 2016-03-17 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco-derived filter element |
US10959456B2 (en) | 2014-09-12 | 2021-03-30 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Nonwoven pouch comprising heat sealable binder fiber |
US9950858B2 (en) | 2015-01-16 | 2018-04-24 | R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company | Tobacco-derived cellulose material and products formed thereof |
SE541198C2 (en) | 2016-11-02 | 2019-04-30 | Winnington Ab | Defibrated tobacco raw material |
WO2019115778A1 (en) * | 2017-12-15 | 2019-06-20 | Swedish Match North Europe Ab | A flavoured moist oral pouched nicotine product comprising monoglyceride |
JP7085641B2 (en) | 2017-12-22 | 2022-06-16 | ジークフリート アクチェンゲゼルシャフト | Method for preparing racemic nicotine by reaction of ethyl nicotinate with N-vinylpyrrolidone in the presence of an alcoholate base |
US10913962B2 (en) | 2018-11-16 | 2021-02-09 | Zanoprima Lifesciences Limited | Process of making (S)-nicotine |
AU2020288679A1 (en) * | 2019-06-07 | 2022-01-06 | Philip Morris Products S.A. | Nicotine pouch composition |
WO2021004928A1 (en) * | 2019-07-05 | 2021-01-14 | Swedish Match North Europe Ab | An oral pouched nicotine product including a filling material comprising nicotine-containing particles |
US20220071984A1 (en) | 2019-09-11 | 2022-03-10 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Oral product with nicotine and ion pairing agent |
SE1951054A1 (en) * | 2019-09-18 | 2021-03-19 | Enorama Pharma Ab | Nicotine pouch |
HRP20231531T1 (en) * | 2019-11-20 | 2024-03-01 | Swedish Match North Europe Ab | An oral pouched nicotine product including a filling material comprising nicotine particles |
US11889856B2 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2024-02-06 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Oral foam composition |
JP2023505352A (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2023-02-08 | ニコベンチャーズ トレーディング リミテッド | Method |
BR112022010877A2 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2022-08-23 | Nicoventures Trading Ltd | NANOEMULSION FOR ORAL USE |
US20210169121A1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2021-06-10 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Liquid oral composition |
US11617744B2 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2023-04-04 | Nico Ventures Trading Limited | Moist oral compositions |
MX2022007023A (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2022-08-15 | Nicoventures Trading Ltd | Oral product. |
US20210169792A1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2021-06-10 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Oral compositions and methods of manufacture |
US20210169132A1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2021-06-10 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Oral composition including gels |
MX2022007086A (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2022-09-09 | Nicoventures Trading Ltd | Agents for oral composition. |
JP2023530239A (en) | 2020-06-08 | 2023-07-14 | ニコベンチャーズ トレーディング リミテッド | Effervescent oral composition |
US11839602B2 (en) | 2020-11-25 | 2023-12-12 | Nicoventures Trading Limited | Oral cannabinoid product with lipid component |
-
2022
- 2022-11-15 US US17/987,570 patent/US20230148652A1/en active Pending
- 2022-11-15 MX MX2024005868A patent/MX2024005868A/en unknown
- 2022-11-15 CA CA3238151A patent/CA3238151A1/en active Pending
- 2022-11-15 EP EP22813726.1A patent/EP4432862A1/en active Pending
- 2022-11-15 WO PCT/IB2022/060997 patent/WO2023084498A1/en active Application Filing
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
USD1049470S1 (en) * | 2021-05-05 | 2024-10-29 | Lucy Goods Inc. | Nicotine pouch |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2023084498A1 (en) | 2023-05-19 |
EP4432862A1 (en) | 2024-09-25 |
CA3238151A1 (en) | 2023-05-19 |
MX2024005868A (en) | 2024-07-15 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20210206554A1 (en) | Oral product with dissolvable component | |
US20210204590A1 (en) | Pouched products | |
US20220346436A1 (en) | Orally dissolving films | |
EP4073307B1 (en) | Pouched product | |
US20220225660A1 (en) | Pouched products with heat sealable binder | |
US20230148652A1 (en) | Oral products with nicotine-polymer complex | |
US20210204585A1 (en) | Pouched products with heat sealable binder | |
US20220400744A1 (en) | Pouched product comprising dissolvable composition | |
US20230148660A1 (en) | Products with enhanced sensory characteristics | |
US20230049343A1 (en) | Shaped pouched products | |
US20220354155A1 (en) | Multi-compartment oral pouched product | |
WO2024095164A1 (en) | Products with spherical filler | |
US12138342B2 (en) | Fleece for oral product with releasable component | |
WO2024201346A1 (en) | Functionalized fleece material production | |
WO2024089588A1 (en) | Shaped pouched products | |
US20210169790A1 (en) | Fleece for oral product with releasable component | |
WO2024079722A1 (en) | Capsule-containing pouched products |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |